1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Gestetner Manuals
  4. All in One Printer
  5. B147
  6. Service manual

Gestetner B147 Service Manual

Hide thumbs
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual
B147/B149/B190
SERVICE MANUAL
001892MIUMIU
RICOH GROUP COMPANIES

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading

Related Manuals for Gestetner B147

Summary of Contents for Gestetner B147

  • Page 1 B147/B149/B190 SERVICE MANUAL 001892MIUMIU RICOH GROUP COMPANIES...
  • Page 3 ® ® RICOH GROUP COMPANIES...
  • Page 5 B147/B149/B190 SERVICE MANUAL 001892MIU...
  • Page 7 It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best interest of Ricoh Corporation and its member companies. NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR PERMISSION OF RICOH CORPORATION.
  • Page 9 WARNING Service Manual contains information regarding service techniques, procedures, processes and spare parts of office equipment distributed by Ricoh Corporation. Users of this manual should be either service trained or certified by successfully completing a Ricoh Technical Training Program. Untrained uncertified users utilizing...
  • Page 11 LEGEND PRODUCT CODE COMPANY GESTETNER LANIER RICOH SAVIN B147 DSc332 LD232c Aficio 2232C C3224 B149 DSc338 LD238c Aficio 2238C C3828 B190 DSc328 LD228c Aficio 2228C C2820 DOCUMENTATION HISTORY REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS 01/2004 Original Printing 09/2004 B190 Addition...

  • Page 13: Table Of Contents

    B147/B149/B190 TABLE OF CONTENTS INSTALLATION 1. INSTALLATION................1-1 1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ............1-1 1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT ................1-1 1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL ................1-1 1.1.3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENT..........1-2 1.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS ..............1-2 1.2 OPTIONAL UNIT COMBINATIONS ............1-3 1.2.1 MACHINE OPTIONS ................1-3 1.2.2 CONTROLLER OPTIONS ..............1-3 1.3 COPIER.....................1-4...
  • Page 14 2.2 PM TABLES ....................2-2 2.3 OTHERS ....................2-5 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........3-1 3.1 SPECIAL TOOLS ................3-1 3.2 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT ................3-2 3.2.1 SCANNING..................3-2 Scanner sub-scan magnification ............3-2 Scanner leading edge and side-to-side registration......3-2 Main scan dot position correction ............3-3 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 15 3.7 LASER OPTICS ..................3-33 3.7.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS .............3-33 3.7.2 LASER OPTICS HOUSING UNIT ..........3-34 Adjustments after Replacing the Laser Optics Housing Unit....3-39 3.7.3 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR ............3-40 3.7.4 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR BOARDS ......3-40 3.8 PCU AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT ............3-41 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 16 3.13.4 HDD....................3-72 3.13.5 NVRAM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE ........3-72 NVRAM on BCU .................3-72 NVRAM on Controller .................3-73 3.13.6 REMOVING THE HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY BOARD - C, B ..3-74 3.13.7 SUB POWER SUPPLY UNIT ............3-74 3.13.8 PSU ....................3-75 3.13.9 DRIVER BOARD ................3-75 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 17 4.6.3 COLOR SHIFT AFTER TRANSFER UNIT REPLACEMENT ..4-78 Check the color shift level ..............4-78 Fusing/ Registration Roller Speed Adjustment ........4-78 4.6.4 BLACK OVER PRINT ..............4-81 Black Over Print Disabled ..............4-81 Black Over Print Enabled..............4-81 4.7 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS ..........4-82 4.7.1 SENSORS ..................4-82 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 18 SP1-xxx (System and Others) ............5-126 SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality) ..........5-127 5.5 REBOOT / SYSTEM SETTING RESET ..........5-137 5.5.1 SOFTWARE RESET ..............5-137 5.5.2 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET ....5-137 System Setting Reset ...............5-137 Copier Setting Reset.................5-138 5.6 FIRMWARE UPDATE ................5-139 5.6.1 TYPE OF FIRMWARE..............5-139 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 19 6.2.3 PROCESS CONTROL SELF CHECK PROCEDURE ....6-10 Step 1: VSG Adjustment ..............6-10 Step 2: ID Sensor Solid Pattern Generation ........6-11 Step 3: Sensor Pattern Detection ............6-11 Step 4: Toner Amount Calculation ............6-11 Step 5: VD, VB, VL Selection and VREF Adjustment ......6-12 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 20 Filtering ....................6-31 ADS (Auto Image Density Selection) ..........6-31 Color Conversion ................6-32 Main Scan Magnification..............6-33 Printer Gamma Correction ..............6-34 Error Diffusion ..................6-36 IPU Board Test ...................6-36 6.5 IMAGE DATA PATH................6-37 Copier Application................6-37 Printer Application................6-37 Scanner Application (1 bit/8 bits) ............6-37 B147/B149/B190 viii...
  • Page 21 6.8.6 TONER CARTRIDGE DETECTION ..........6-65 6.9 PAPER FEED..................6-66 6.9.1 OVERVIEW ..................6-66 6.9.2 DRIVE – TRAY 1, TRAY 2, AND BY-PASS TRAY ......6-67 6.9.3 PAPER LIFT – TRAYS 1 & 2............6-68 6.9.4 PAPER SIZE DETECTION – TRAYS 1 & 2........6-69 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 22 6.12.4 OIL SUPPLY AND CLEANING .............6-93 Oil Supply Pad and Roller..............6-93 Oil Supply Mechanism ................6-94 6.12.5 WASTE OIL ..................6-95 Bottle Set Sensor ................6-95 Waste Oil Sensor ................6-96 6.12.6 NEW FUSING OIL SUPPLY UNIT DETECTION ......6-96 6.12.7 ENERGY SAVER MODES ............6-97 Overview.....................6-97 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 23 6.17.3 USB CONNECTORS..............6-119 6.17.4 PIN ASSIGNMENT ..............6-119 6.17.5 REMARKS ABOUT USB ............6-120 Related SP Mode................6-120 6.18 IEEE 802.11B (WIRELESS LAN) ............6-121 6.18.1 SPECIFICATIONS..............6-121 LED Indicators ..................6-121 6.18.2 TRANSMISSION MODES ............6-122 Ad Hoc Mode ..................6-122 Infrastructure Mode................6-122 6.18.3 SECURITY FEATURES .............6-123 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 24 5.2 ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT ............7-13 5.3 TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT ............7-13 5.4 2000-SHEET LARGE CAPACITY TRAY ...........7-13 5.5 TWO-TRAY FINISHER & PUNCH UNIT ...........7-14 5.6 BOOKLET FINISHER ................7-15 5.7 MULTI-BIN OUTPUT TRAY ..............7-16 ARDF B597 SEE SECTION B597 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 25 SEE SECTION B602 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS FAX OPTION B603 SEE SECTION B603 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS INTERNET FAX (IFAX) SEE SECTION IFAX FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS DataOverwriteSecurity Unit B692/B694 SEE SECTION B692/B694 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS xiii B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 27 IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY 1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals, make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged. 2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible. 3. Note that some components of the copier and the paper tray unit are supplied with electrical voltage even if the main power switch is turned off.
  • Page 28 1. SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly when exposed to an open flame. 2. Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductors in accordance with local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.) 3.

  • Page 29: Symbols And Abbreviations

    Trademarks ® ® ® Microsoft , Windows , and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and /or other countries. ® PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated. ® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company. ®...
  • Page 31 Rev. 05/2004 INSTALLATION AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER B597 FAX OPTION B603 INTERNET FAX (IFAX) PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT B598 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B600 TROUBLESHOOTING TWO-TRAY FINISHER B599 BOOKLET FINISHER B602 SERVICE TABLES DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS SPECIFICATIONS ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT B601 DataOverwriteSecurity Unit B692/B694...

  • Page 33: Installation

    INSTALLATION...

  • Page 35: Installation Requirements

    8. Install the machine on a strong, level base. (Inclination on any side must be no more than 5 mm.) 9. Avoid installing the machine in areas that may be subjected to strong vibration. 1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 36: Machine Space Requirement

    1. Input voltage level: 120 V, 60 Hz: More than 10 A 220 V ~ 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz: More than 6 A 2. Permissible voltage fluctuation: ±10 % 3. Do not put or place anything on the power cord. B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 37: Optional Unit Combinations

    Italic: Child options (Child options require a parent option.) 1.2.2 CONTROLLER OPTIONS Options Remarks Printer/scanner For Asia model only 256 MB memory IEEE 1394 IEEE 802.11b One from the four USB 2.0 Bluetooth PostScript 3 File Format Converter Italic: Child options (Child options require a parent option.) B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 38: Copier

    Make sure to plug the cables into the correct sockets. 1. ARDF Rating voltage output connector for accessory Max. DC24V 2. Duplex unit Rating voltage output connector for accessory Max. DC24V 3. Finisher Rating voltage output connector for accessory Max. DC24V B146I932.WMF B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 39: Installation Flow Chart

    Will the punch unit installed? Install the punch unit. Install the finisher. B146I901.WMF The finisher requires an optional paper tray unit or the LCT. A punch unit is dedicated to the two-tray finisher or the booklet finisher. B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 40: Machine Installation

    12. Decal–Copy Prohibition .............1 13. Oil Supply Unit ..............1 14. External Tray ..............1 15. Power Cord................1 16. Exposure Glass Cleaning Cloth .........1 17. Cloth Holder...............1 18. NECR (New Equipment Condition Report) ......1 * The Asia model does not include these accessories. B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 41: Installation Procedure

    1. Remove the tape and padding on the copier. To remove the tapes from the developer units follow the procedure below: a) Turn the transfer belt release lever counterclockwise. b) Loosen two screws that fasten the drum plate. Then lift the plate until you hear a click. B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 42 (See Step a). 2. Remove the pin [A]. (As shown on the previous page.) NOTE: Keep the pin. You may need it to transport the machine in the future 1.4.3). B146I913.WMF 3. Remove the tape from the oil supply unit. B146I914.WMF B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 43 5. Install the fusing unit [A] to the copier. B146I912.WMF 6. Shake the toner cartridge five or six times. 7. Install the toner cartridges to the copier. 8. Check that the hooks [B] hold the cartridge correctly. B146I915.WMF 9. Install the external tray [C]. B146I916.WMF B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 44 NOTE: Paper tray number decals are also used for the optional paper tray or the optional LCT. Keep any remaining decals for use with these optional units. 18. Install the optional ARDF or the optional platen B146I928.WMF cover. B147/B149/B190 1-10...

  • Page 45: Settings Relevant To Contract

    Programs the service station fax number. Serivice Tel. SP5-812-001 No. Setting through 004 The number is printed on the counter list when the meter charge mode is selected, so that the user can fax the counter data to the service station. 1-11 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 46: Moving Machine

    ( x 2, 2 brackets). G080I911.WMF CAUTION: After moving the machine to it’s new location, reinstall the machine stands. Without them, the machine may tip over when you pull out a paper tray or while you work on the machine. B147/B149/B190 1-12...

  • Page 47: Transporting Machine

    NOTE: The release lever lifts the transfer belt up and holds it against the black PCU. The surfaces of the belt and PCU may be damaged by the friction between them if you transport the machine with the two units in this position. 1-13 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 48 3) After having moved the machine to a new location, be sure to perform Auto Adjust (User Program mode) or forced Line Position Adjustment (SP5-993-002) to optimize color line alignment. 4) Make sure that the side fences in the trays are properly positioned to prevent color shifting. B147/B149/B190 1-14...

  • Page 49: Optional Unit

    Check the quantity and condition of the following accessories. Description Q’ty 1. Securing Bracket ..............1 2. Right Stand Bracket ............1 3. Left Stand Bracket ..............1 4. Front Stand................1 5. Rear Stand ................1 6. Screw M4 x 10 ..............4 7. Stepped Screw ..............2 B146I929.WMF 1-15 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 50 3. Do not lift the copier with the paper feed unit installed. The handle and grips may be damaged. 1. Remove all tape on the paper tray unit. B146I919.WMF 2. Remove the paper tray and remove all tape and padding. 3. Install the front stand [A] ( x 2). B146I920.WMF B147/B149/B190 1-16...
  • Page 51 4. Install the rear stand [A]. 5. Attach the stand brackets [B][C] ( x 1 for each). B146I921.WMF 6. Grasp the handle [D] and grips [E] of the copier. 7. Lift the copier and install it on the paper feed unit [F]. B146I004.WMF 1-17 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 52 9. Fasten the knob screw [A]. 10. Re-install tray 2. B146I922.WMF 11. Open the right cover. 12. Install the link bracket [B] (1 knob screw). B146I923.WMF 13. Turn on the main switch. 14. Check the machine's operation and copy quality. B147/B149/B190 1-18...

  • Page 53: Two-Tray Paper Feed Unit

    Check the quantity and condition of the following accessories. Description Q’ty 1. Securing Bracket ..............1 2. Right Stand Bracket ............1 3. Left Stand Bracket ..............1 4. Front Stand................1 5. Rear Stand ................1 6. Screw M4 x 10 ..............4 7. Stepped Screw ..............2 B146I929.WMF 1-19 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 54 3. Do not lift the copier with the paper feed unit installed. The handle and grips may be damaged. 1. Remove all tape on the paper tray unit. B456I002.WMF 2. Remove the paper trays and remove all tape and padding. 3. Install the front stand [A] ( x 2). B456I103.WMF B147/B149/B190 1-20...
  • Page 55 4. Install the rear stand [A]. 5. Attach the stand brackets [B][C] ( x 1 for each). B598I901.WMF 6. Grasp the handle [D] and grips [E] of the copier. 7. Lift the copier and install it on the paper feed unit [F]. B146I004.WMF 1-21 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 56 9. Fasten the knob screw [A]. 10. Re-install tray 2. B146I902.WMF 11. Open the right cover. 12. Install the link bracket [B] (1 knob screw). B146I903.WMF 13. Turn on the main switch. 14. Check the machine's operation and copy quality. B147/B149/B190 1-22...
  • Page 57 Check the quantity and condition of the following accessories. Description Q’ty 1. Securing Bracket ..............1 2. Right Stand Bracket ............1 3. Left Stand Bracket ..............1 4. Front Stand................1 5. Rear Stand ................1 6. Screw M 4 x 10 ..............4 7. Stepped Screw ..............2 B146I929.WMF 1-23 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 58 3. Do not lift the copier with the LCT installed. The handle and grips may be damaged. 1. Remove all tape. B457I001.WMF 2. Press the stopper [A] and pull out the tray [B]. 3. Install the front stand [C] ( x 2). B457I003.WMF B147/B149/B190 1-24...
  • Page 59 4. Install the rear stand [A]. 5. Attach the stand brackets [B][C] ( x 1 for each). B598I901.WMF 6. Grasp the handle [D] and grips [E] of the copier. 7. Lift the copier and install it on the LCT [F]. B600I901.WMF 1-25 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 60 9. Fasten the knob screw [A]. 10. Re-install tray 2. B146I917.WMF 11. Open the right cover. 12. Install the link bracket [B] (1 knob screw). B146I918.WMF 13. Turn on the main switch. 14. Check the machine's operation and copy quality. B147/B149/B190 1-26...
  • Page 61 5. Screw M4 x 10 ................2 6. Screwdriver Tool ................1 7. Decal.....................1 8. Decal.....................1 B146I924.WMF Installation Procedure  CAUTION Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug its power cord before starting the installation procedure. 1. Remove all tape. G564I122.WMF 1-27 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 62 4. Fasten the two screws [B] to secure the ARDF. 5. Attach the left [C] and right [D] stopper brackets (Knob screw x 2 for each). 6. Connect the cable [E] to the copier. 7. Fasten the cable with the clamp [F]. B147/B149/B190 1-28...
  • Page 63 14. Turn the main switch on, and check the operation. 15. Make a full size copy, and check that the registrations (side-to-side and leading edge) and image skew are correct. If they are not, adjust the registration and image skew with SP mode. G564I106.WMF 1-29 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 64: Accessory Check

    Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug its power cord before starting the installation procedure. 1. Remove all tape. Check that no tape remains inside the front cover and on the left cover. 2. Fold the external tray [A]. B146I905.WMF B147/B149/B190 1-30...
  • Page 65 3. Set the link rail [A] on the link-rail holder [B]. 4. Install the link-rail holder (with the link rail) to the copier [C] ( x 2). B146I906.WMF 5. Install the duplex-unit support [D] to the copier ( x 3). B146I907.WMF 1-31 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 66 B146I909.WMF 9. Install the two trays [C] ( x 1 for each). 10. Extend the external tray of the copier (see step 2). 11. Turn the main switch on and check the operation. B146I910.WMF B147/B149/B190 1-32...
  • Page 67 Check the quantity and condition of the following accessories. Description Q’ty 1. Punch unit................1 2. Sensor arm ................1 3. Spring ..................1 4. Screw M3 x 6 ...............2 5. Step screw................2 6. Hopper.................1 7. Spacer (2 mm) ..............1 8. Spacer (1 mm) ..............2 B146I933.WMF 1-33 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 68 1. Unpack the punch unit and remove all tapes and shipping retainers. 2. Open the front door of the finisher and remove the rear cover [A] ( x 4). 3. Remove the bracket [B] ( x 2) and paper guide [C] (stepped  x 1). B147/B149/B190 1-34...
  • Page 69 4. Remove the hopper cover [A] ( x 2). 5. Install the sensor bracket [B] (stepped  x 1). 6. Install the spring [C]. 7. Install the 2 mm spacer [D]. 8. Install the punch unit [E] ( x 2, stepped  x 1). 1-35 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 70 10. Slide in the hopper [B]. 11. Fasten the two 1-mm spacers [C] to the rear frame for future adjustment. NOTE: The spacers are used to adjust the horizontal positioning of the punch holes. 12. Reassemble the finisher and check the punch operation. B147/B149/B190 1-36...

  • Page 71: Multi-Bin Output Tray

    1. Front Tray Holder..............1 2. Rear Tray Holder ..............1 3. Tray ..................2 4. Screw (M3 x 14)..............4 5. Discharge Brush ..............2 6. Ground Plate for Left Cover..........1 7. Ground Plate for Upper Exit..........1 8. Ground Plate for Lower Exit..........1 B146I934.WMF 1-37 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 72: Installing The Multi-Bin Output Tray

    SP6–901–1; and change the multi-bin output tray setting. NOTE: The multi-bin output tray is not automatically recognized by the printer mainframe. The multi-bin G306I103.WMF output tray cannot be used until you have changed this SP mode setting. B147/B149/B190 1-38...

  • Page 73: Booklet Finisher

    8. Screw M4 x 6 ................8 9. Screw M3 x 14 ................4 10. Rail....................1 11. Stapler unit..................1 12. Staple cartridge................1 13. Pad .....................3 B602I912.WMF NOTE: Make sure that you retain the pads. The pads are white and made of styrofoam. 1-39 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 74: Adjusting The Height

    4. Remove the adjuster plates [B] ( x 2). 5. Change the height [C]. 6. Reinstall the adjuster plates [D]. 7. Take out the finisher from the box and stand it up. 8. Check that the height is correct, and remove the pads. B147/B149/B190 1-40...

  • Page 75: Main Body

    1. Remove all tape and padding. B602I001.WMF 2. Remove the screw cover [A]. 3. Install the rail joint [B] ( x 4). 4. Reinstall the screw cover. B602I902.WMF 5. Install the regular tray [C] ( x 4). B602I903.WMF 1-41 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 76 [A][B] ( x 2 for each). 7. Install the duplex-unit support [C] ( x 3). B602I004.WMF 8. Slide the rail [D] through the rail holder [E]. 9. Install the rail holder (with the rail) to the copier ( x 2). B602I904.WMF B147/B149/B190 1-42...
  • Page 77 B602I907.WMF 12. Turn the knob [B] clockwise until the staple-cartridge holder [C] reaches the front-most position. 13. Install the staple cartridge [D] firmly to the staple-cartridge holder. B602I908.WMF 14. Turn on the main switch and check the operation. 1-43 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 78: Optional Punch Unit

    Check the quantity and condition of the following accessories. Description Q’ty 1. Punch unit................1 2. Decal ...................1 3. Screw M4 x 6 (with the base) ..........1 4. Cable ...................2 B647I001.WMF 1. Remove the front lower cover [A] ( x 2). B602R988.WMF B147/B149/B190 1-44...
  • Page 79 5. Remove the front cover [D] ( x 2). 6. Remove the rear cover [E] ( x 3). NOTE: Do not damage the mylar when you remove the screw. 7. Remove the right top cover with the paper entrance cover [G] ( x 4). 1-45 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 80 8. Remove the right top cover [A] from the paper entrance cover [B]. B647I003.WMF 9. Install the punch unit [C] ( x 2, 1 screw with the base [D]) B647I901.WMF 10. Install the right top cover [E] ( x 2). B647I005.WMF B147/B149/B190 1-46...
  • Page 81 13. Reassemble the booklet finisher unit. NOTE: Check that the side guide and the front cover correctly join with each other [E]. 14. Attach the decal [F]. 15. Turn on the main switch and check the punch operation. 1-47 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 82: Installation Procedure

    If you release it too early, the SD card may be pushed out of the slot. You need to install the optional 256 MB memory with the printer/scanner unit. B612I901.WMF B147/B149/B190 1-48...
  • Page 83 I/F Card Slot B ( x 2). 2. Install the Ethernet board [B] (Knob-screw x 2). B612I002.WMF 3. Remove the slot cover from I/F Card Slot A [C] ( x 2). 4. Install the IEEE 1284 interface board [D] (Knob-screw x 2). B612I903.WMF 1-49 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 84 8. Remove the dummy keys [C] and install one of the printer keys [D][d] and one of the scanner keys [E][e]. Prin ter Scanner B612I902.WMF 9. Attach the ferrite core [F] to the LAN cable. 10. Connect the LAN cable. B603I904.WMF B147/B149/B190 1-50...

  • Page 85: Postscript 3

    2. Turn the SD-card face [B] to the rear of the machine, and push it slowly into the slot until you hear a click. 3. Attach the slot cover ( x 1). G369I901.WMF 4. Attach the “Adobe PostScript 3” decal [C] to the front cover. G369I902.WMF 1-51 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 86: Mb Memory

    1.5.11 256 MB MEMORY  CAUTION Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure. B612I001.WMF 1. Remove the controller board [A] ( x 3). 2. Install the expansion memory [B]. 3. Reinstall the controller board ( x 3). B147/B149/B190 1-52...

  • Page 87: File Format Converter

    CAUTION Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure. B609I901.WMF 1. Remove the slot cover from I/F Card Slot C [A] ( x 2). 2. Install the file format converter board [B] (Knob-screw x 2). 1-53 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 88: Ieee 1394 (Firewire)

    1.5.9.) 1. Remove the slot cover from I/F Card Slot D [A] ( x 2). 2. Make sure that the jumper [B] is set on “TB2.” 3. Install the FireWire board [C] (Knob-screw x 2). B147/B149/B190 1-54...

  • Page 89: Up Mode Settings For Ieee 1394

    Determines how successive initiator login requests are handled during login in for SBP-2. 5-839 012 Login Enables or disables exclusive login for SBP-2. 5-839 013 Login MAX Sets the limit for the number of logins for SBP-2. Range: 1 ~ 62. 1-55 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 90: Usb 2.0

    LAN), USB 2.0, IEEE1394 (FireWire), Bluetooth. (For the information on the Asia model, see section 1.5.9.) 1. Remove the slot cover from I/F Card Slot D [A] ( x 2). 2. Install the FireWire board [B] (Knob-screw x 2). B147/B149/B190 1-56...

  • Page 91: Usb Sp Settings

    USB high speed mode. HS/FS: High speed/Full speed auto adjust (480Mbps/12Mbps) Full speed (12Mbps fixed) 5-844-002 Vendor ID Displays the vendor ID. DFU 5-844-003 Product ID Displays the product ID. DFU 5-844-004 Dev. Release Displays the development release version number. Number 1-57 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 92: Ieee 802.11B (Wireless Lan)

    LAN), USB 2.0, IEEE1394 (FireWire), Bluetooth. (For the information on the Asia model, see section 1.5.9.) 1. Remove the slot cover from I/F Card Slot D [A] ( x 2). 2. Install the wireless LAN board [B] (Knob-screw x 2). B147/B149/B190 1-58...
  • Page 93 9. If reception is poor, you may need to move the machine: • Make sure that the machine is not located near an appliance or any type of equipment that can generate a strong magnetic field. • Position the machine as close as possible to the access point. 1-59 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 94: Up Mode Settings For Wireless Lan

    Press here to display the current status of the bandwidth. One of the following is displayed to reflect the reception status of the wireless LAN: Good 76 ~ 100% Fair 41 ~ 75% Poor 21 ~ 40% Unavailable 0 ~ 20% B147/B149/B190 1-60...

  • Page 95: Sp Mode Settings For Ieee 802.11B Wireless Lan

    Used to confirm the current WEP key setting. 5-840-011 WEP Key Select Used to select the WEP key (Default: 00). 5-840-020 WEP Mode Used to display the maximum length of the string that can be used for the WEP Key entry. 1-61 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 96: Bluetooth

    LAN), USB 2.0, IEEE1394 (FireWire), Bluetooth. (For the information on the Asia model, see section 1.5.9.) 1. Remove the slot cover from I/F Card Slot D [A] ( x 2). 2. Install the Bluetooth board [B] (Knob-screw x 2). B147/B149/B190 1-62...
  • Page 97 OPTIONAL UNIT G377I901.WMF 3. Insert the Bluetooth card [A] into the slot. 4. Press the antenna [B] to extend it. 5. Attach the antenna cap [C]. 1-63 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 98: Check All Connections

    2. Enter the printer user mode and print the configuration page. User Tools > Printer Settings > List Test Print > Config. Page NOTE: The same data can also be printed by executing SP1-004 – Print Summary. All installed options are listed in the “System Reference” column. B147/B149/B190 1-64...

  • Page 99: Key Counter Holder

    15 mm (0.6") tape. NOTE: You do not need the smaller piece for the installation. A674I901.WMF 3. Remove the scanner right cover [A] ( x 2). 4. Clean the area [B] with alcohol. 5. Attach the tape. A674I902.WMF 1-65 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 100 • The bottom end of the key counter holder [B] is 62 mm (2.4") below the bottom end of the scanner right cover [A]. • The bracket on the back of the key counter holder [C] is aligned to the rear end of the scanner cover [D]. 7. Reassemble the covers. A674I905.WMF B147/B149/B190 1-66...

  • Page 101: Anti-Condensation Heater

    4. Remove the exposure glass [D] with the left scale [E] ( x 2). NOTE: You do not have to remove the ARDF exposure glass. If the glass is removed, position the glass marker [F] at the rear-left corner when reattaching. B146I940.WMF 1-67 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 102 6. Pass the cable through the opening [B] in the rear. B146I942.WMF 7. Attach the clamps [C] to the rear frame. 8. Fasten the cable with the clamps. 9. Connect the connector [D]. 10. Reassemble the copier. B146I943.WMF B147/B149/B190 1-68...

  • Page 103: Anti-Condensation Heater

    “” sign [F] is on the lower end. NOTE: The “–” sign means “on.” The “” sign means “off.” 7. Install the switch to the bracket [G]. 8. Make sure that the heater switch is off. B146I948.WMF 1-69 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 104 NOTE: The connectors [A][K] are under the heater-tray cover. 17. Reassemble the copier and install tray 1 and tray 2. 18. Attach the “On/Stand by” decal on the left-hand side of the main switch (not the tray heater switch). Stand by B146I952.WMF B147/B149/B190 1-70...

  • Page 105: Preventive Maintenance

    PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE...

  • Page 107: Settings

    018) To enable the New Unit Set program (and to replace a unit), perform as follows: 1. Start the SP mode ( 5.1.1). 2. Select a program from SP7-804-011 to 018. 3. Select "EXECUTE." 4. Quit the SP mode. B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 108: Pm Tables

    PM timing sooner). Chart: A4 (LT)/5% Mode: 3 copies/original (prints/job) Environment: Normal temperature and humidity Yield may change depending on circumstances and print conditions. Symbol key: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricate, I: Inspect B147/B149 Copier B190 120K 140K Item...
  • Page 109 Exit Roller Damp cloth; alcohol Inverter Roller Damp cloth; alcohol Idle Rollers Damp cloth; alcohol NOTE: 240k copies (= 80k originals x 3 copies/original) (B147/B149) 216k copies (= 72k originals x 3 copies/original) (B190) One-Tray Paper Feed Unit Item 240K Remarks...
  • Page 110 PM TABLES Booklet Finisher Item Remarks Rollers Damp cloth Shafts Damp cloth Sensors Blower brush Jogger fences Booklet Finisher Punch Kit Item Remarks Punch Chad Discard chad. B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 111: Others

    Separation Roller Damp cloth Two-Tray Paper Feed Unit Item 150K 500K Remarks 1000K Feed Rollers Damp cloth Pickup Rollers Damp cloth Separation Rollers Damp cloth Item 150K 500K 1000K Remarks Relay Roller Damp cloth Bottom Plate Pad Damp cloth B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 113: Replacement And Adjustment

    REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT...

  • Page 115: Special Tools

    USB Reader/Writer A029 9387 Digital Multimeter – FLUKE87 G021 9350 Loop-back Connector – Parallel C401 9503 20X Magnification Scope A2579300 Grease Barrierta – S552R 52039501 Silicon Grease G-501 A0929503 C4 Color Test Chart (3 pcs/set) A0069104 Scanner Positioning Pin (4pcs/set) B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 116: Image Adjustment

    IMAGE ADJUSTMENT 3.2 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT 3.2.1 SCANNING Before doing the following scanner adjustments, perform or check the printing registration/side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment. NOTE: Use a C4 test chart to perform the following adjustments. Scanner sub-scan magnification 1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed stations.

  • Page 117: Main Scan Dot Position Correction

    5. Press the “SP Mode” key to return to the SP mode and open SP4-932. Compare the current values against the table. SP4-932-1 Dot correction R left edge SP4-932-2 Dot correction R right edge SP4-932-3 Dot correction B left edge SP4-932-4 Dot correction B right edge B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 118: Ardf

    IMAGE ADJUSTMENT 3.2.2 ARDF ARDF side-to-side and leading edge registration B146R964.WMF A: Leading edge registration B: Side-to-side registration B146R965.WMF Make a temporary test chart as shown above using A3/DLT (11 x 17 inch) paper. 1. Place the temporary test chart on the ARDF and make a copy from one of the feed stations.

  • Page 119: Registration

    The registration in both main- and sub-scan directions may fluctuate within the following tolerance. 1st side • Sub-scan direction: 0 ± 1.5 mm • Main-scan direction: 0 ± 2 mm 2nd side in duplex • Sub-scan direction: 0 ± 3 mm • Main-scan direction: 0 ± 4 mm B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 120: Adjustment Procedure

    IMAGE ADJUSTMENT Adjustment Procedure 1. Enter SP mode and access SP5-997. 2. Print out the pattern (14: 1-dot trimming pattern) with SP5-997. NOTE: Registration may change slightly print by print as shown above. Therefore print a few pages of the trimming pattern for step 3 and 4, and average the leading edge and side-to-side registration values and adjust each SP mode.

  • Page 121: Printer Gamma Correction

    Offset middle ID, high ID, and ID max, the greater the density. There are four adjustable modes (SP4-918-009): • Copy Photo mode • Copy Letter mode • Copy Letter (Single Color) mode • Copy Photo (Single Color) mode B146R967.WMF B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 122 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT Adjustment Procedure 1. Copy the C-4 chart in mode that you are going to adjust. 2. Enter the SP mode. 3. Select “Copy SP.” 4. Select SP4-918-009. 5. Adjust the offset values until the copy quality conforms to the standard ( table below).
  • Page 123 Highlight (Low ID) Adjust the offset value so that (K, C, M, and Y) dirty background is not visible on the copy and the density of level 3 is slightly lighter that of level 3 on the C-4 chart. B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 124 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT - Text (Letter) Mode, Single Colour - Step Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart (K) Adjustment Standard ID max: Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 10 matches that of level 10 on the C-4 chart. Middle (Middle ID) Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 6 matches...

  • Page 125: Printer Mode

    7. Adjust the color density with SP1-104 as shown below comparing the tone control test sheet with the C4 test chart. NOTE: Adjust the density in order from “ID Max”, “Shadow”, “Middle”, and then “Highlight”. 8. Save the adjusted settings with SP1-105-001. 3-11 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 126 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT Adjustment Reference For Gamma Correction The following tables show the adjustment reference for gamma correction. The tables show the level of the color scale on the C4 test chart and on the tone control test sheet printed in the printer SP mode. For example, for K at text mode, grade 12 on the tone control test sheet should be the same as grade 7 on the C4 chart.

  • Page 127: Duplex Inverter Unit

    1. External tray [A] 2. Open the duplex left cover [B]. 3. Top cover [C] ( x 4) B146R985.WMF 3.3.2 DUPLEX CONTROL BOARD 1. Top cover ( 3.3.1) 2. Duplex control board [A] ( x 4,  x 7) B146R925.WMF 3-13 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 128: Duplex Inverter Motor 1

    DUPLEX INVERTER UNIT 3.3.3 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR 1 1. Top cover ( 3.3.1) 2. Exit tray [A] 3. Duplex unit [B] ( x 1,  x 1) B146R955.WMF 4. Inner cover [C] ( x 2) 5. Duplex control board bracket [D] (...

  • Page 129: Duplex Inverter Motor 2 And Switch

    3.3.6 EXIT SENSOR 1 AND 2 1. Top cover ( 3.3.1) 2. Open the duplex unit. 3. Exit sensor 1 [A] ( x 1,  x 1, 1 bracket) 4. Exit sensor 2 [B] ( x 1) B146R135.WMF 3-15 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 130: Duplex Feed Unit

    DUPLEX FEED UNIT 3.4 DUPLEX FEED UNIT 3.4.1 DUPLEX DRIVE BOARD B146R136.WMF B146R114.WMF 1. Open the front cover 2. Duplex feed unit [A] ( x 1) 3. Inner cover [B] ( x 1) 4. Duplex drive board [C] ( x 2,  x 3) 3.4.2 DUPLEX FEED MOTOR 1.

  • Page 131: Duplex Feed Sensor

    DUPLEX FEED UNIT 3.4.3 DUPLEX FEED SENSOR B146R138.WMF 1. Duplex feed unit ( 3.4.1) 2. Duplex feed sensor [A] ( x 1) 3-17 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 132: Exterior Covers

    EXTERIOR COVERS 3.5 EXTERIOR COVERS NOTE: 1) For the procedure to remove the paper exit tray, see section 3.7.2, “Laser Optics Housing Unit.” 2) For the procedure to remove the paper exit cover, see section 3.12.14, “Paper Exit.” 3.5.1 REAR, FRONT, AND RIGHT SIDES 1.
  • Page 133 CAUTION: Do not put anything on the operation panel. After you remove the upper front cover, the operation panel may become unstable. 8. Scanner right cover ( 3.5.3) 9. Rear right cover [E] ( x 4, 1 hook) B146R905.WMF 3-19 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 134: Left Side

    EXTERIOR COVERS 3.5.2 LEFT SIDE B146R921.WMF 1. Duplex unit ( 3.3.3) 2. Duplex unit base cover [A] ( x 2) 3. Duplex inverter guide [B] 4. Duplex unit base [C] ( x 6) 5. Left cover [D] ( x 6, 1 hook) 6.

  • Page 135: Operation Panel And Scanner Covers

    3. Upper front cover ( 3.5.1) 4. Operation panel [A] ( x 4,  x 1) 5. Scanner left cover [B] ( x 2, 1 hook) 6. Scanner right cover [C] ( x 2) 7. Scanner rear cover [D] ( x 1) 3-21 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 136: Scanner Unit

    SCANNER UNIT 3.6 SCANNER UNIT 3.6.1 EXPOSURE GLASS 1. Rear scale [A] ( x 3) 2. Exposure glass with left scale [B] ( x 2) 3. ARDF exposure glass [C] NOTE: When reattaching the exposure glass and ARDF exposure glass, position the glass marker [D] at the rear-left corner.

  • Page 137: Sensor Board Unit (Sbu)

    [B] ( x 4,  x 4) B146R128.WMF 6. After replacing the sensor board unit, adjust the following SP modes ( 3.3.12): • SP4–008 (Scanner leading edge magnification) • SP4–010 (Scanner leading edge registration) • SP4–011 (Scanner side-to-side registration) 3-23 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 138: Exposure Lamp Stabilizer

    SCANNER UNIT 3.6.4 EXPOSURE LAMP STABILIZER 1. Exposure glass with left scale 3.6.1) 2. Sensor board unit ( 3.6.3) 3. Exposure lamp stabilizer [A] ( x 2,  x 2) B146R129.WMF 3.6.5 XENON LAMP 1. Rear cover ( 3.5.1) 2. Operation panel and scanner covers 3.5.3) 3.

  • Page 139: Scanner Power Supply Unit (Psu)

    1. Scanner PSU ( 3.6.6) 2. Scanner motor [A] ( x 2, Spring x 1) 3. Timing belt [B] Reassembling 1. Install the motor. 2. Install the timing belt. 3. Install the spring. 4. Fasten the screws. B146R133.WMF 3-25 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 140: Front Scanner Wire

    SCANNER UNIT 3.6.8 FRONT SCANNER WIRE 1. Front frame ( 3.6.5) 2. Front scanner wire clamp [A] 3. Front scanner wire bracket [B] ( x 1) 4. Front scanner wire and scanner drive pulley [C] ( x 1) B146R140.WMF Reassembling the Front Scanner Wire 1.
  • Page 141 [E], with the end going via the front track of the right pulley [F] and the front track of the movable pulley [G]. NOTE: Do not secure the scanner wire bracket with the screw yet. B146R143.WMF 3-27 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 142 SCANNER UNIT 7. Remove the tape from the drive pulley. 8. Insert a scanner positioning pin [A] through the 2nd carriage hole [B] and the left holes [C] in the front rail. Insert another scanner positioning pin [D] through the 1st carriage hole [E] and the right holes in the front rail [F].

  • Page 143: Rear Scanner Wire

    5. Scanner PSU ( 3.6.6) 6. Five screws on the right-hand side (viewed from the front) [A] 7. Two screws on the left-hand side (viewed from the front) [B] 8. Pivot brackets [C][D] ( x 1 for each) 3-29 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 144 SCANNER UNIT B146R929.WMF 9. Rear frame [A] ( x 2,  x 7) NOTE: To remove the screw [B] on the bottom-right corner (viewed from the front), lift the right-hand side (viewed from the front) of the scanner unit. 10. Rail frame [C] ( x 5) NOTE: When reassembling, make sure that the home position sensor [D] is not damaged by the sensor blade near the rear end of the xenon lamp.
  • Page 145 Example: At the front of the machine, the side of the drive pulley with the three windings should face the front of the machine. At the rear of the machine, it should face the rear. 6. Perform steps 7 through 13 in the “Reassembling the Front Scanner Wire” Section. 3-31 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 146: Touch Panel Position Adjustment

    SCANNER UNIT 3.6.10 TOUCH PANEL POSITION ADJUSTMENT NOTE: It is necessary to calibrate touch panel in the following cases: • When the operation panel is replaced. • When the controller board is replaced. • When the touch panel detection function is not working correctly Do not attempt to use items [2] to [9] on the Self-Diagnostic Menu.

  • Page 147: Laser Optics

    This printer uses a class IIIb laser beam with a wavelength of 655 nm and an output of 7 mW. The laser can cause serious eye injury. 3-33 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 148: Laser Optics Housing Unit

    LASER OPTICS 3.7.2 LASER OPTICS HOUSING UNIT CAUTION: Before installing a new laser optics housing unit, remove the sponge padding and the tag from the new unit. Steps 1 through 4 refer to the procedure for a newly supplied unit that replaces the old one.
  • Page 149 [C]. NOTE: Remove screw [D] and screw [E]. CAUTION: Do not lift the scanner unit any higher after setting the support under the scanner unit. The support may come off the opening [F]. B146R924.WMF 3-35 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 150 LASER OPTICS 14. Securing screws for the paper exit tray [A] ( x 2) NOTE: Do not remove the paper exit tray yet. B146R912.WMF 15. Securing screws for the toner supply unit [B] ( x 4) 16. Securing screws for the laser optics housing unit [C] (...
  • Page 151 18. Paper exit tray [A] B146R923.WMF 19. Connector cover [B] ( x 3) 20. Four flat cables [C] 21. Connector [D]  B146R909.WMF 22. Flat cable bracket [E] ( x 1) 23. Release the cable from the clamps [F]. B146R913.WMF 3-37 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 152 LASER OPTICS 24. Duct [A] 25. Securing screws for the laser optics housing unit [B] ( x 2) NOTE: When reassembling, attach the ground cable [C]. 26. Palace a sheet of paper [D] between the laser optic housing unit and the machine rear frame.

  • Page 153: Adjustments After Replacing The Laser Optics Housing Unit

    5. Adjust the laser beam pitch values in SP2-109-2 and -3 until the printout is correct, as shown below. Feed direction Adjustment not completed Adjustment completed B146R153.WMF 6. Execute SP5-993-2 or “Auto Colour Registration” in the User Tools (Maintenance > Colour Registration > Auto Colour Registration > OK). 3-39 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 154: Polygon Mirror Motor

    LASER OPTICS 3.7.3 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR 1. Laser optics housing unit ( 3.7.2) 2. Cover [A] ( x 4) 3. Polygon mirror motor [B] ( x 1,  x 4) B146R915.WMF 3.7.4 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR BOARDS 1. Laser optics housing unit ( 3.7.2) 2.

  • Page 155: Pcu And Development Unit

    9. Release the lever and pull a PCU [E] out until the handle appears. 10. Grasp the handle [F] and pull the PCU out of the machine. 11. Turn the main switch on. The machine starts the initialization for the new unit. B146R155.WMF 3-41 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 156: Paper Feed

    PAPER FEED 3.9 PAPER FEED 3.9.1 PICK-UP, FEED, AND SEPARATION ROLLERS Tray 1 and Tray 2 1. Tray 1 and Tray 2 2. Pick-up roller [A] ( x 1) 3. Feed roller [B] ( x 1) 4. Separation roller [C] ( x 1) B146R961.WMF By-pass Tray 1.

  • Page 157: Paper Width Detection Board

    NOTE: There is a square opening [C] on each side. Release the hooks by pushing them through these openings. 4. Paper width detection board [D] ( x 1) NOTE: To remove the connector, open the bottom cover [E]. B146R157.WMF 3-43 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 158: Vertical Transport Sensor

    PAPER FEED 3.9.3 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR B146R158.WMF 1. Open the right door. 2. Vertical transport cover [A] ( x 4) NOTE: To have easier access to the four screws, remove the right rear cover 3.9.4). 3. Vertical transport sensor [B] ( x 1) 3.9.4 RIGHT DOOR UNIT B146R159.WMF B146R160.WMF...

  • Page 159: Registration Sensor And Relay Sensors

    4. Clutch holder [A] ( x 2, 1 bearing) 5. Paper feed clutch for tray 1 [B] ( x 1) 6. Clutch holder [C] ( x 2, 1 bearing) 7. Paper feed clutch for tray 2 [D] ( x 1) B146R161.WMF 3-45 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 160: By-Pass Feed Clutch

    PAPER FEED 3.9.7 BY-PASS FEED CLUTCH 1. Right door unit ( 3.9.4) 2. By-pass tray cover [A] ( x 1, 1 hook) 3. Loosen the screw on the right door latch [B]. 4. Turn the latch in the opposite direction. 5.

  • Page 161: Paper Feed Motor

    3.5.1) 2. Sub power supply unit ( 3.9.8) NOTE: This step is necessary to release the cable. 3. Paper feed motor [A] ( x 3,  x 1) NOTE: The connector is CN604 on the driver board [B]. 3-47 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 162: Transfer And Paper Transport Unit

    TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT 3.10 TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT 3.10.1 TRANSFER UNIT NOTE: When removing or installing the transfer unit, grasp the central areas of the front and rear frame. Do not touch the transfer belt [A]. Do not damage the entrance mylar [B].

  • Page 163: Transfer Belt Cleaning Unit

    2) When reassembling, check that the transfer unit release lever is put back to the original position ( 3.8). After replacing the transfer belt cleaning unit, perform forced line position adjustment (SP5-993-002 or  > Maintenance > Color Registration). 3-49 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 164: Cleaning Blade And Cleaning Roller

    TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT 3.10.3 CLEANING BLADE AND CLEANING ROLLER B146R166.WMF 1. Transfer belt cleaning unit ( 3.10.2) 2. Cleaning blade [A] ( x 2) 3. Tension spring [B] B146R167.WMF 4. Lever [C] 5. 3 gears [D] ( x 1) 6.
  • Page 165 8. Cleaning brush gear [B] ( x 1) 9. Cleaning brush [C] (Bushing x 1) After replacing the cleaning blade, perform forced line position adjustment (SP5- 993-002 or “Maintenance menu – Color registration - Auto Adjust” in User Program mode). 3-51 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 166: Transfer Belt

    TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT 3.10.4 TRANSFER BELT NOTE: Do not touch the transfer belt during handling. When replacing the belt, hold the belt at its end. B146R169.WMF 1. Transfer belt cleaning unit ( 3.10.2) 2. Transfer unit ( 3.10.1) 3.
  • Page 167 8. Grasp the upper end of the transfer belt and pull the transfer belt [A] up and out. NOTE: If the drive rollers are dirty, clean them with a damp cloth. After replacing the transfer belt, perform forced line position adjustment (SP5-993- 002 or  > Maintenance > Color Registration). 3-53 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 168: Transfer Unit Drive Motor

    TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT 3.10.5 TRANSFER UNIT DRIVE MOTOR B146R171.WMF 1. Transfer belt cleaning unit ( 3.10.2) 2. Pull out the transfer unit ( 3.10.1). 3. Release lever [A] ( x 1) 4. Front cover [B] ( x 3) B146R937.WMF 5.

  • Page 169: Id Sensors

    1. Transfer unit ( 3.10.1) 2. Fusing unit ( 3.12.1) 3. Black PCU ( 3.8) 4. ID sensor bracket [A] ( x 2,  x 1) When reassembling, check that the ID sensor bracket receives the drum- positioning plate correctly. 3-55 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 170: Fusing

    FUSING 3.12 FUSING  CAUTION 1. Be careful when handling the fusing unit. It is very hot. 2. Take care not to spill silicone oil. 3.12.1 FUSING UNIT B146R173.WMF CAUTION: Do not tilt the fusing unit [A] while handling it. The oil supply unit [B] can fall off the fusing unit after the grip [C] is released from the oil supply unit.

  • Page 171: Oil Supply Unit And Upper Cover

    1. Detach the finisher from the printer if it is installed. 2. Open the duplex inverter unit if it is installed. 3. Fusing unit ( 3.12.1) 4. Oil supply unit [A] 5. Upper cover [B] ( x 4) 3-57 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 172: Cleaning Unit

    FUSING 3.12.3 CLEANING UNIT B146R175.WMF 1. Upper cover ( 3.12.2) 2. 2 handle guides [A][B] ( x 2 for each) 3. Handle [C] (Spring x 1) B146R176.WMF 4. Gear [D] and collar [E] (Retaining ring x 1) 5. Cleaning unit [F] ( x 2) NOTE: When reattaching, make sure that you set the cleaning unit [F] in place first and then attach the gear [D] and collar [E].

  • Page 173: Heating Roller Lamp

    3.12.4 HEATING ROLLER LAMP B146R177.WMF 1. Upper cover ( 3.12.2) 2. Heating roller lamp [A] ( x 2) NOTE: When reinstalling, make sure the front [B] and rear [C] ends of the lamp are on the correct terminals. 3-59 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 174: Fusing Belt Unit

    FUSING 3.12.5 FUSING BELT UNIT B146R178.WMF 1. Cleaning unit ( 3.12.3) 2. Heating roller lamp ( 3.12.4) 3. Upper paper guide plate ( 3.12.8) 4. Pressure roller gear [A] (C ring x 1) 5. 2 pressure brackets [B][C] (Spring x 1 for each) 6.

  • Page 175: Hot Roller

    FUSING 3.12.6 HOT ROLLER B146R179.WMF 1. Fusing belt unit ( 3.12.5) 2. Hot roller [A] (Bushing x 2) 3.12.7 HEATING ROLLER B146R180.WMF 1. Pressure roller ( 3.12.6) 2. Heating roller [A] 3-61 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 176: Paper Guide Plates And Stripper Pawls

    FUSING 3.12.8 PAPER GUIDE PLATES AND STRIPPER PAWLS B146R181.WMF 1. Upper cover ( 3.12.2) 2. Lower paper guide plate [A] ( x 2) B146R182.WMF 3. Upper paper guide plate [B] ( x 2) 4. 5 stripper pawls [C] B147B149/B190 3-62...

  • Page 177: Thermistor And Fuse

    FUSING 3.12.9 THERMISTOR AND FUSE B146R183.WMF 1. Lower right cover [A] ( x 2) B146R184.WMF 2. Thermistor [B] ( x 1,  x 1) 3-63 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 178: Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp

    FUSING B146R185.WMF 3. Fuse [A] ( x 3) 3.12.10 PRESSURE ROLLER FUSING LAMP B146R186.WMF 1. Fusing belt unit ( 3.12.5) 2. Pressure roller fusing lamp [A] ( x 2) B147B149/B190 3-64...

  • Page 179: Pressure Roller

    2. Lower paper guide plate ( 3.12.8) 3. Drive gear holder [A] ( x 1) 4. Drive gear [B] ( x 1) 5. Lower right cover ( 3.12.9) 6. Pressure roller unit [C] ( x 5,  x 2) 3-65 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 180 FUSING B146R188.WMF 7. Pressure roller gear [A] (C ring x 1, Bushing x 1) 8. Pressure roller holder [B] ( x 1) 9. Pressure roller [C] (C ring x 1) B147B149/B190 3-66...

  • Page 181: Fusing Unit Fan

    3. Connector cover (on the top of the controller box) ( 3.13.1) 4. Fusing fan duct [A] ( x 2,  x 1) B146R116.WMF 5. Release the hooks and remove the upper cover [B]. 6. Fusing fan [C] B146R939.WMF 3-67 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 182: Waste Oil Bottle

    FUSING 3.12.13 WASTE OIL BOTTLE 1. Open the front cover [A]. 2. Release the hook [B]. 3. Waste oil bottle [C] 4. Close the bottle with the lid [D]. 5. Dispose of the bottle (with waste oil in it) in accordance with your local regulations.

  • Page 183: Electrical Components

    5. Ground cable [D] ( x 1) B146R959.WMF 6. Duct [E] ( x 1,  x 2) 7. Ground cable [F] ( x 1) 8. Two connectors [F] 9. Swing out the controller box [G] ( x 5). B146R960.WMF 3-69 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 184: Moving The High Voltage Supply Unit - C, B Out Of The Way

    ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 3.13.2 MOVING THE HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY UNIT - C, B OUT OF THE WAY 1. Rear cover ( 3.5.1) 2. Swing out the high voltage supply unit [A] ( x 2). B146R190.WMF 3.13.3 CONTROLLER, IPU, AND BCU NOTE: 1) Before replacing the BCU or controller, print out the SMC reports (“SP Mode Data”...
  • Page 185 Data” and “Logging Data”) has been printed out. 2) After replacing the BCU or controller, remove the NVRAM on the old board and install it on the new board. If the NVRAM on the old board is defective, replace the NVRAM ( 3.13.5). 3-71 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 186: Hdd

    ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 3.13.4 HDD You cannot separate the hard-disk drive into two different hard-disk drives. If you should separated it into two and replace one of them, the controller does not recognizes the hard-disk drive. 1. Controller ( 3.13.3) 2. HDD [A] ( x 4, Shoulder-screw x 3) B146R191.WMF 3.13.5 NVRAM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE NVRAM on BCU...

  • Page 187: Nvram On Controller

    8. Copy the data from the SD card to the NVRAM ( SP5-825-001) if you have successfully copied them to the SD card. 9. Specify the SP and UP mode settings. 10. Perform ACC for the copier application program. 11. Perform ACC for the printer application program. 3-73 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 188: Removing The High Voltage Supply Board - C, B

    ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 3.13.6 REMOVING THE HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY BOARD - C, B B146R121.WMF 1. Rear cover ( 3.5.1) 2. High voltage supply board [A] (All 's,  x 6) 3.13.7 SUB POWER SUPPLY UNIT B146R122.WMF 1. Rear cover ( 3.5.1) 2.

  • Page 189: Psu

    NOTE: Check that the interlock switches on the PSU work normally after reinstalling the PSU (open/close the left and front doors). 3.13.9 DRIVER BOARD B146R193.WMF 1. Rear cover ( 3.5.1) 2. Swing out the controller box ( 3.13.1). 3. Driver board [A] (All 's,  x 4) 3-75 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 190: Drive Unit

    DRIVE UNIT 3.14 DRIVE UNIT 3.14.1 REGISTRATION CLUTCH B146R944.WMF 7. Rear cover ( 3.5.1) 8. Swing out the controller box ( 3.13.1). 9. Registration clutch [A] ( x 1,  x 1) 3.14.2 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCHES 1. Drum gears ( 3.14.3). 2.

  • Page 191: Development Motor - Cmy

    4. Turn the drum gears [B] counterclockwise, so the shoulder screws [C][D] are in the three, seven, or eleven o'clock position. NOTE: By doing that, you can align the three corners of each drum-gear shaft to the three openings on the development-clutch securing plate [E]. 3-77 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 192 DRIVE UNIT B146R948.WMF 5. 4 drum gears [A] ( x 2 for each) NOTE: 3) Do not move the drum-gear shafts after removing the drum gears. 4) The print quality may be affected if any of the teeth on the drum gears are damaged.

  • Page 193: Drum Drive Motor - Cmy And Drum Drive Motor - K

    3.14.4 DRUM DRIVE MOTOR - CMY AND DRUM DRIVE MOTOR - K 1. Development clutch securing plate 3.14.3) 2. Drum drive motor - CMY [A] ( x 2) 3. Drum drive motor - K [B] ( x 2) B146R194.WMF 3-79 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 194: Development Drive Motor - K

    DRIVE UNIT 3.14.5 DEVELOPMENT DRIVE MOTOR - K 1. Fusing fan duct ( 3.12.12) 2. Development clutch securing plate 3.14.3) 3. Solenoid cover [A] ( x 2) B146R951.WMF B146R952.WMF 4. Development clutch securing plate ( 3.14.3) 5. Development drive motor – K [B] (with the fusing clutch [C]) ( x 4,  x 2) NOTE: When reassembling, remove the bushing [D] and install the development drive motor–K (with the fusing clutch) first.

  • Page 195: Toner Supply Unit

    2. All development units and PCUs ( 3.8) 3. Transfer unit ( 3.10.1) 4. Development clutch securing plate ( 3.14.3) 5. Right inner cover with the drum positioning plate [A] ( x 3) 6. M development unit plate [B] ( x 1) 3-81 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 196 TONER SUPPLY UNIT B146R195.WMF 7. Development unit left guide [A] ( x 1) 8. Open the right door. 9. Registration upper stay [B] ( x 4) B146R196.WMF CAUTION: 1) When you remove the toner path cover and a toner supply pipe, the toner spills out.
  • Page 197 Reinstalling the M Toner Supply Unit B146R197.WMF 1. Wind the harness [A] on the shaft. 2. Insert the toner collection pipe [B]. NOTE: Check that the pipe does not come off the unit. B146R198.WMF 3. Remove the toner supply unit bushing [C]. 3-83 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 198 TONER SUPPLY UNIT B146R199.WMF 4. Install the unit [A] and secure it with the screws. 5. Unwind the harness and connect it. 6. Install the bushing. 7. Connect the toner supply pipe and the waste toner collection pipe [B]. 8. Check that the pipes [C] do not come off the unit.

  • Page 199: C And Y Toner Supply Units

    4. PCU 3C guide rail [A] ( x 2) NOTE: 1) To replace the Cyan toner supply unit, remove the M PCU guide. To replace the Y toner supply unit, remove the Cyan PCU guide. 2) Pull the front plate [B] slightly. 3-85 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 200: K Toner Supply Unit

    TONER SUPPLY UNIT B146R202.WMF 5. Toner path cover [A] ( x 2) 6. Branch toner path covers [B][C] ( x 1) NOTE: To replace the Cyan toner supply unit, remove the cover on the right- hand side [B]. To replace the Y toner supply unit, remove the cover on the left-hand side [C].

  • Page 201: Troubleshooting

    TROUBLESHOOTING...

  • Page 203: Process Control Error Conditions

    2. Check if the development unit is properly set. development unit” 3. If the problem is still the same, check the following: is displayed. • Poor connection of connectors • TD sensor defective • Harness damage • BCU board failure • Firmware problem (engine main or MUSIC) B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 204 NOTE: After you set "Enable" in SP5-999-005, 006, 007, or 008, the machine starts developer initialization. If an error other than Error 8 occurs, developer initialization is automatically resumed by opening and closing the front door or turning the main switch off and on. B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 205: Process Control Self-Check Result

    (if "LD correction Power" is set in SP3- 125-002). Forced Process control self- A cover was opened or the Do the process control termination check was forcibly main switch was turned off self-check again. terminated. during the self-check. B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 206: Line Position Adjustment Result

    Note 1: Concerning the error codes (05, 06, 07 or 10) which stop sampling data when either the front, center, or rear ID sensor detect an error, the machine may display the error code for both ID sensors in some cases. B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 207 In addition, the green LED on the BICU stays on or off under the following condition. 1. The MUSIC CPU resets due to 1. Fix the bias leak and/or replace electrical noise generated by a high voltage leak on a damaged OPC drum. B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 208 1. Poor connection between the toner 1. Check the connection between cartridge detection board and the the detection board and memory memory chip on the toner cartridge chip. 2. The memory chip on the toner 2. Replace the toner cartridge. cartridge fails. B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 209: Scanner Test Mode

    ASIC 1 → ASIC 2 ASIC 1 → ASIC 3 → ASIC 1 → ASIC 2 ASIC 2 → ASIC 1 → ASIC 3 → ASIC 1 → ASIC 2 ASIC 3 → Ri 10 Scanner ASIC → ASIC 1 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 210 • Error code 25 may be detected if the scanner and IPU are incorrectly connected. When you have conducted a check, turn the main switch off and on before conducting another check. When you have conducted all necessary checks, turn the main switch off and on. B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 211 SC code is detected. NOTE: 1) If the problem concerns electrical circuit boards, first disconnect, then reconnect the connectors before replacing the PCBs. 2) If the problem concerns a motor lock, first check the mechanical load before replacing motors or sensors. B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 212: Service Call Conditions

    Two-tray finisher 740 - Booklet finisher 800 - Error after ready condition 820 - Diagnostics error Controller 860 - Hard disk 880 - Unique for a specific model 900 - Counter Others 920 - Memory 990 - Others B147/B149/B190 4-10...

  • Page 213: Sc Table

    5. Replace the scanner motor. • Scanner HP sensor 6. Replace the HP sensor. defective 7. Replace the scanner wire, timing belt, • Harness between pulley, or carriage. SBU and HP sensor disconnected • Scanner wire, timing belt, pulley, or carriage defective 4-11 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 214 5. Replace the scanner motor. • Scanner HP sensor 6. Replace the HP sensor. defective 7. Replace the scanner wire, timing belt, • Harness between pulley, or carriage. SBU and HP sensor disconnected • Scanner wire, timing belt, pulley, or carriage defective B147/B149/B190 4-12...
  • Page 215 NOTE: This error is detected when the main switch is turned on. • After the negate interruption of FGATE occurs, IDU is not recognized in the specified duration. NOTE: This error is detected during scanning operations. 4-13 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 216 • The lock signal does not • Cable disconnection become high within 10 seconds after turning off the polygon motor. • The lock signal does not become low within 0.2 second after the polygon motor reaches the targeted operating speed. B147/B149/B190 4-14...
  • Page 217 (for C&M) synchronizing detector detector board (the board. beam does not target 5. Replace the laser optics housing unit. the photo detector.) 6. Replace the BCU. • Defective LD unit 7. Replace the PSU. • Defective BCU • Defective +5VLD circuit 4-15 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 218 5. Replace the laser optics housing unit. or rear (K&Y) 6. Replace the BCU. synchronizing If a synch. detector board cannot be detector board replaced, do the following as a • Defective LD unit temporary measure: • Disable main scan length detection (SP 2-919-001) B147/B149/B190 4-16...
  • Page 219 • When the feedback signal stays Low 7 seconds after completing the laser exposure, or • When the feedback signal stays Low until the laser exposure timing for the next page in multi-page print mode. 4-17 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 220 • Mechanical problem to switch off. 3. Replace the LD positioning motor. when switching the 4. Replace the LD home position actuator sensor. • Brown fuse (FU81) on 5. Check and/or replace the PSU. the Power supply unit B147/B149/B190 4-18...
  • Page 221 2. Reset the related color development sensor outputs is less SC 375 Vt error [Y] than 0.5V. than 0.5V.) unit. SC 376 Vt error [C] 3. Replace the related color • Defective TD sensor SC 377 Vt error [M] development unit. 4-19 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 222 OK. If the • When Vk is out of the problem gamma error M image quality is not OK, fix the following range: problem. Then, enable the SC -150V ≤ Vk ≥ 150V detection again. • Development gamma calculation error B147/B149/B190 4-20...
  • Page 223 PCU. • Incorrect power pack consecutive times, this SC 5. Replace the power pack B/C. B/C output code is generated. 6. Replace the cable. • Damaged cable 7. Replace the BCU. • Defective BCU • PCU not found 4-21 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 224 • Cable connection side of the laser optics unit, is 4. Replace the BCU. error higher than 70°C for 10 • BCU defect seconds consecutively, the BCU determines that the circuit is shorted and displays this SC code B147/B149/B190 4-22...
  • Page 225 • Transfer belt unit problem SC 481 Waste toner The waste toner vibrator does • Loose connector 1. Turn the main switch off and on. vibrator error not operate. 2. Replace the motor. • Defective motor 4-23 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 226 3. Check and/or replace the paper lift motor error user to reset the tray. If this sensor. • Defective bottom condition occurs three 4. Check and/or replace the tray lift plate lift mechanism consecutive times, the SC is motor. generated. B147/B149/B190 4-24...
  • Page 227 • If the end fence home disconnection position sensor stays ON for a specific number of pulses after the tray motor and stack transport clutch turn on to transport the paper stack. 4-25 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 228 18 disconnection 3. Check and/or replace the defective seconds, the machine asks the component. • Defective lift sensor user to reset the tray. If this or connector condition occurs three disconnection consecutive times, the SC is generated. B147/B149/B190 4-26...
  • Page 229 • Defective BCU during fusing unit warm-up. SC 543 Heating roller The detected fusing • Defective PSU 1. Replace the PSU. fusing lamp temperature stays at 210°C or 2. Replace the BCU. • Defective BCU overheat more for five seconds. 4-27 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 230 SC 553 Pressure roller The detected pressure roller • Defective PSU 1. Replace the fusing unit. fusing lamp temperature stays at 210°C or 2. Replace the PSU. • Defective BCU overheat more for five seconds. 3. Replace the BCU. B147/B149/B190 4-28...
  • Page 231 1. The BCU receives a signal • Main board problems 4. Replace the BCU or main board of SC 622 Bank which is generated by the in the peripherals peripherals. peripherals only just after communication the main switch is turned error 4-29 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 232 RAM error accounting device. device has occurred. 3. Replace the battery. • Battery error SC 635 MF accounting The accounting device sends device error 4 the controller the report that indicates the battery voltage error has occurred. B147/B149/B190 4-30...
  • Page 233 2. Check the connection between the • Defective controller power on starts warming up from BCU and controller. • Defective BCU energy-saving mode, the 3. Replace the controller. controller does not receive a 4. Replace the BCU. command signal from the BCU. 4-31 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 234 • During any operation except scanner unit. • SBU board defective initialization, the SBU sends 4. Replace the SBU board. a hardware-reset • IPU board defective 5. Replace the IPU board. acknowledgement to the • External noise IPU. B147/B149/B190 4-32...
  • Page 235 4. Replace the BCU board. • A device-status error occurs controller board 690-002: M during I2C bus 690-003: C communication. 690-004: K • The I2C bus communication is not established due to an error other than a buffer shortage. 4-33 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 236 3. Turn the main switch off and on. stopper HP sensor is not • Pick-up motor 4. Replace the pick-up motor. activated. defective (not 5. Replace the control board. rotating) • Timing belt out of position • ARDF main board defective B147/B149/B190 4-34...
  • Page 237 H.P. sensor and motor are • Loose connection error feed-out motor turns on. properly connected. • Stack feed-out motor 3. Replace the stack feed-out H.P. overload sensor. • Defective stack feed- 4. Replace the stack feed-out motor. out motor 4-35 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 238 2. Check if the connectors of the sensor • Defective stapler H.P. motor error time after the staple motor and motor are properly connected. sensor turns on. 3. Replace the stapler H.P. sensor. • Defective stapler 4. Replace the stapler motor. motor B147/B149/B190 4-36...
  • Page 239 2 shift motor and motor are properly connected. sensor turns on. 3. Replace the tray shift 2 sensor. • Defective tray 2 shift 4. Replace the tray 2 shift motor. motor 4-37 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 240 • Loose connection of • The stack-tray upper-roller the stack-tray upper- home-position sensor does roller home-position not turn on with in 2 sensor seconds after the paddle motor starts to lower the roller. B147/B149/B190 4-38...
  • Page 241 • Defective rear-jogger- 5. Replace the rear jogger fence motor. not turn on within 3 seconds fence home-position when the rear-jogger-fence sensor motor is driving the fence to • Loose connection of its home position. the rear-jogger-fence home-position sensor 4-39 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 242 1,084 milliseconds after the same home-position sensor turns off. → The stack-tray exit motor retires to drive the belts, but the stack-tray belt home-position sensor still does not turn on within another 1,084 milliseconds. B147/B149/B190 4-40...
  • Page 243 But the home home-position sensor position sensor does not • Defective folder-roller turn off within 9.247 home-position sensor seconds. • The home position sensor does not turn on within 9.247 seconds after this same sensor turns off. 4-41 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 244 The checksum in the backup • Defective EEPROM 1. Turn the main switch off and on. punch-unit data is inconsistent. 2. Check that the EEPROM is installed. (on the punch-unit controller error 3. Replace the EEPROM. controller) • EEPROM not installed B147/B149/B190 4-42...
  • Page 245 1. Turn the main switch off and on. • Defective controller error running, other processes do 2. Replace the controller. • Software error not operate at all. 3. See NOTE 1 at the end of the SC table 4-43 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 246 • SC code • Detailed error code • Program address B147/B149/B190 4-44...
  • Page 247 ROM. [6104] PHY IC error The PHY IC on the controller cannot be properly recognized. [6105] PHY IC loop- An error occurred during the back error loop-back test for the PHY IC on the controller. 4-45 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 248 1. Turn the main switch on and off. error 1 program stored in the ROM 2. Replace the ROM DIMM • Defective controller DIMM is checked. If the check 3. Replace the controller. sum of the program is incorrect, this SC code is displayed. B147/B149/B190 4-46...
  • Page 249 Defective EEPROM 1. Replace the EEPROM on the error different data in mirrored controller. areas. SC 850 Network The network is unusable. • Defective controller 1. Turn the main switch off and on. interface error 2. Replace the controller. 4-47 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 250 2. Check the connection between the • Defective cables the power is supplied to the HDD and controller. • Defective HDD HDD. 3. Check and replace the cables. • Defective controller 4. Replace the HDD. 5. Replace the controller. B147/B149/B190 4-48...
  • Page 251 SC 871 FCU flash ROM An error is detected in the • Defective flash ROM 1. Turn the main switch off and on. error flash ROM that stores the 2. Replace the MBU (on the FCU). address-book data. 4-49 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 252 A necessary font is not found • A necessary font is 1. Check that the SD card stores correct error in the SD card. data. not found in the SD card. • The SD card data is corrupted. B147/B149/B190 4-50...
  • Page 253 2. Check that application programs are • An option required by correctly configured. the application (RAM, 3. Take necessary countermeasures DIMM, board) is not specific to the application program. If installed the logs can be displayed on the operation panel, see the logs. 4-51 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 254 2. Check if the RAM-DIMM and ROM- RAM-DIMM, ROM- turned on. DIMM DIMM are properly connected. 3. Reinstall the controller system • Defective controller firmware. • Software problem 4. Replace the controller. B147/B149/B190 4-52...
  • Page 255 PCB of the downloading and prevent subsequent downloading. If this problem occurs, the damaged PCB must be replaced. 4-53 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 256 • SMC - Logging (SP5-990-004) • Printer driver settings used when the problem occurs • All data displayed on the screen (SC code, error code, and program address where the problem is logged.) • Image file which causes the problem, if possible B147/B149/B190 4-54...

  • Page 257: Troubleshooting Guide

    Smeared image at trailing edge investigation (select Check the fusing unit speed. 'Print to File' in the Crow marks driver). Check the humidity condition and adjust the transfer bias if necessary. B146T901.WMF 4-55 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 258 When the PCU/development unit is close to its life end, the developer or the cleaning blade of the PCU wears out, causing vertical colour lines, bands, or dirty background. Check the related colour unit and replace it if necessary. B146T902.WMF B147/B149/B190 4-56...

  • Page 259: Troubleshooting Guide

    When paper touches the If 4C thin lines become smeared: appear in solid image areas. spurs and the spurs do not rotate, the spurs scratch the mage. B146T903.WMF If white lines appear in solid image areas: B146T904.WMF B147/B149/B190 4-57...
  • Page 260 Making prints with a low image area ratio causes the toner-carrier attraction to increase, resulting in low image density. Activating the Auto TD Adjustment corrects toner density within the target range; however, it takes up to 6 minutes to complete the self-check and Auto TD Adjustment. 4-58 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 261 ID proper development potential gap during machine operation. without adjusting the toner concentration. Over the course of the print operation, the ID will then get closer and closer to the target level. B147/B149/B190 4-59...
  • Page 262 (i.e. not processed as text/line data), decrease the setting for Photo from 260% to 170 - 190%. NOTE: If the toner limit is lowered too much, it may cause the density of shadow areas to be not smooth. 4-60 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 263: Detailed Explanation

    The static electricity built up on the fusing belt may cause toner to move, resulting in the smeared image. This is most noticeable with 600x600dpi printing. B147/B149/B190 4-61...
  • Page 264 100% (-0.2% to -0.8%). After adjusting SP1-004-4, check the image quality also with normal paper in the 1200 dpi mode. Readjust it so that the image quality level is acceptable for both thick and normal paper if necessary. 4-62 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 265 ID proper development potential gap during machine operation. without adjusting the toner concentration. Over the course of the print operation, the ID will then get closer and closer to the target level. B147/B149/B190 4-63...
  • Page 266 4. Consumes toner in the development unit without toner supply until toner end is detected. 5. Starts toner recovery mode. 6. Starts process control self-check. NOTE: It takes about 20 minutes to complete this mode, to prevent carrier flowing out. 4-64 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 267 UP mode. If color(s) is missing, open the position. unit and reposition the mirror(s). • Flat cable(s) is not properly • Reconnect the flat cable(s) firmly. connected to the BCU board. B147/B149/B190 4-65...

  • Page 268: Copy Image Processing

    Raise the "Soft" level in the following menu: Mono color images are B&W, This symptom is based on the copier > Copy Quality > Sharp/Soft > Soft not sharp enough. Text/Photo, characteristics. 4-66 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 269 Text/Photo, characteristics. This symptom tends to occur • Specify the full-color mode when using color originals. shaded. when the background is shaded with a rough dot • Specify the text mode when using black-and-white pattern. originals. B147/B149/B190 4-67...

  • Page 270: Color Shift

    B146T905.WMF • Paper skew directly affects the color shift between the front and rear sides. There are several factors. One of them is the position of the side fences. 4-68 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 271 Reposition the side fences. Page 4-57 and rear sides • Side fences are not properly set. Reposition the paper attraction roller unit. • Pressure between the paper attraction roller and transfer belt is not even at the front and rear sides. B147/B149/B190 4-69...

  • Page 272: Adjustment Standard

    ID sensors. Print out a pattern with the following settings: Execute the forced toner-density SP5-997-002 "1 dot grid (R)" adjustment with the following SP: SP5-997-004 "Full Color" SP3-126-002 SP5-997-005 "600 x 600" Do the lines shift? B146T906.WMF 4-70 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 273 Print out a pattern with the Enable the transfer-belt feedback following settings: feature with the following SP: Do the lines shift? SP5-997-002 "1 dot grid (R)" SP5-995-020 SP5-997-004 "Full Color" SP5-997-005 "600 x 600" and "1200 x 1200" Do the lines shift? B146T907.WMF B147/B149/B190 4-71...
  • Page 274 When adjusting the speed, change the setting in 0.1 on page 4-57 for the steps, and check the result by printing the grid pattern. 1200 dpi symptom.) Then, repeat this step until the shift between magenta (by-pass feed) and black is minimized. 4-72 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 275 Correction [dots] = +(40/42.4) = Approx. +1 • If the magenta line has shifted down in relation to black by 70µm in 600dpi mode, subtract 2 from the current setting of SP5-993-17. Correction [dots] = -(70/42.4) = Approx. –2 B147/B149/B190 4-73...
  • Page 276 Correction [%] = (0.1/287) x 10000 = Approx. +4 • If the magenta line is reduced by 0.05 mm in relation to the black line, subtract “2” from the current setting of SP5-993-014. Correction [%] = -(0.05/287) x 10000 = Approx. -2 4-74 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 277 • Check if the transfer belt is in correct position, if the toward the trailing tension springs are properly set, or if the paper edge. attraction roller is properly installed.. 3.7.4 Transfer Belt) B147/B149/B190 4-75...

  • Page 278: How To Measure The Gap Between Color Lines

    (percentage) of SP1- 004-001, 002, or 007 depending on the mode selected. • SP1-004-001 Normal paper, B146T913.WMF Color mode, 1200 dpi (62.5 mm/s) • SP1-004-002 Normal Paper, Color mode, 600 dpi (125 mm/s) • SP1-004-007 Thick Paper (62.5 mm/s) B147/B149/B190 4-76...
  • Page 279 Pattern 4 Color shift (registration) in the main- scan direction Colored line shifts in the main-scan direction and the amount of shift is the same at left, center, and right. This is caused by incorrect color registration. B146T912.WMF 4-77 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 280: Color Shift After Transfer Unit Replacement

    4. Perform the line position adjustment (SP5-993-002 or ‘Auto Adjust’ in User Program mode). 5. Print a 1-dot grid pattern using A3/11" x 17" paper in 600 dpi mode. 6. If the color shift in the main-scan direction is not within the adjustment standard, follow the troubleshooting guide. B147/B149/B190 4-78...
  • Page 281 2. Check if there is any color which has shifted from the black line by the same amount all the way down the page from leading to trailing edge. If there is, follow the troubleshooting procedure (Sub-scan/Whole image). 4-79 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 282 3. Depending on the paper used, a horizontal band may appear at 60 mm (2.76") from the leading edge on A3 (11" x 17") paper. If the horizontal band is observed on the 2-dot pattern, decrease the setting of SP1-004-006 in 0.05% steps until the problem is solved. B147/B149/B190 4-80...

  • Page 283: Black Over Print

    [B] and yellow [A] toner) is transferred on the paper [C]. 2. The black toner [D] is transferred on the color toner. Even if the line position of the black toner is not correct, an unexpected white line does not appear. B146T921.WMF 4-81 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 284: Electrical Component Defects

    Relay sensor 205-A8 Paper Jam is detected even if there Shorted is no paper. Paper Jam is detected whenever a Open print is made. Vertical transport Paper Jam is detected even if there 208-B11 sensor is no paper. Shorted B147/B149/B190 4-82...
  • Page 285 Waste toner 213-A4 Waste toner near full message is sensor not displayed even when a waste Shorted toner near full condition exists, causing waste toner leak. NOTE: The CN numbers are the connector numbers on the BCU. 4-83 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 286: Blown Fuse Conditions

    Main functions The Main CPU does not function correctly. properly. The MUSIC CPU functions The MUSIC CPU does not function LED 2 (Green) correctly. properly. LED 1 (Yellow) The DSP functions correctly. The DSP does not function properly. B147/B149/B190 4-84...
  • Page 287 SERVICE TABLES...

  • Page 289: Service Tables

    1. Press the Clear Mode key.  2. Use the keypad to enter “107”.  3. Hold down Clear/Stop for at least 3 seconds. 4. Enter the Service Mode. Exiting SP Mode Exit 5. Press Exit twice to return to the copy window. B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 290: Types Of Sp Modes

    After accessing the SP mode, select one of the Service Program modes (Copy, Printer, Scanner, or Fax) from the touch panel as shown in the diagram below. This section explains the functions of the Printer/Copy/Scanner SP modes. Please refer to the Fax service manual for the Fax SP modes. B146S910.WMF B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 291: Sp Mode Button Summary

    Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen display (page). Press to scroll the display to the previous or next line, line by line. Press to move the highlight on the left to the previous or next selection in the list. B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 292: Switching Between Sp Mode And Copy Mode For Test Printing

    Press Start , and then press SP Mode (highlighted) in the copy window to return to the SP mode display. 7. When you are finished, press Exit twice to return to the copy window. B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 293: Exiting Service Mode

    [FC, K], [FC, Y], [FC, M], or [FC, C]: Black, Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan in full color mode Paper Feed Station P: Paper tray B: By-pass table Fusing Section H: Heating roller P: Pressure roller Print Mode S: Simplex D: Duplex Process Speed 62.5, 125, 185 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 294: Others

    NOTE: If “Alphanumeric” is written to the right of the bracket as shown above, the setting of the SP mode is displayed on the screen using alphanumeric characters instead of only numbers. However, the settings in the bracket in the SP mode table are explained by using only the numbers. B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 295: Copy Service Mode

    [ -5 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step ] 1-003-2 Paper Tray 125 *BCU 1-003-3 Paper Tray 185 *BCU 1-003-4 By-pass N 62.5 *BCU 1-003-5 By-pass N 125 *BCU 1-003-6 By-pass N 185 *BCU 1-003-7 By-pass TH *BCU 1-003-8 By-pass OHP *BCU B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 296 1-006-1 [K] 62.5 Special *BCU [ -4.0 to 4.0 / 0 / 0.1 %/step ] 1-006-2 [K] 125 Special *BCU 1-006-3 [YMC] 62.5 Special *BCU [ -4.00 to 4.00 / -0.1 / 0.05 %/step ] 1-006-4 [YMC] 125 Special *BCU B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 297 When the machine is in the recovery mode from the energy saver or auto off mode, the machine becomes ready when both heating and pressure roller temperatures reach the specified temperature. Ready temperature = (Target temperature specified in SP1-104-25 or 105-3 to 28) – Temperature specified in this SP mode. B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 298 ** Requires Engine firmware 1.09C or later. 1-106 [Temperature Display] Fusing Temperature Display (Heating or Pressure) Displays the current temperature of the heating and pressure rollers. 1-106-1 Heat Roller [ 0 to 200 / - / 5°C/step] 1-106-2 Pressure Roller B147/B149/B190 5-10...
  • Page 299 When receiving a new job within the time specified in this SP mode after the last job is completed, fusing idling is not done because the fusing section was already warmed up during the last job. 1-910-1 Idling Time *BCU [ 0 to 180 / 1 / 1 minute/step ] DFU 5-11 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 300 [ 1 to 255 / 20 / 1 sheet/step ] 1-913-9 Mode 2 185 narrow *BCU [ 1 to 255 / 10 / 1 sheet/step ] 1-913-10 Mode 2 185 wide *BCU [ 1 to 255 / 20 / 1 sheet/step ] B147/B149/B190 5-12...
  • Page 301 1-916-4 Idling Time *BCU [ 0 to 360 / 0 / 1 sec/step ] Specifies how long the extra idling operation is executed when special paper is used and the line speed is 185 mm/s. 5-13 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 302 [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Off 1: On This SP enables or disables the 30-second fusing unit idling at the start of an OHP print job. When enabled, idling is done even if the machine is in the ready condition. B147/B149/B190 5-14...

  • Page 303: Sp2-Xxx (Drum)

    2-103-2 back *BCU [ 0.0 to 6.0 / 3.0 / 0.1 mm/step ] 2-103-3 lead *BCU [ 0.0 to 6.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 mm/step ] 2-103-4 trail *BCU [ 0.0 to 6.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 mm/step ] 5-15 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 304 [ 0 to 1023 / 590 / 1/step ] DFU 2-103-109 CF:[M] OHP/TH *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 590 / 1/step ] DFU 2-103-110 CF:[C] OHP/TH *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 590 / 1/step ] DFU B147/B149/B190 5-16...
  • Page 305 Forces toner to be supplied to the development unit. The toner supply clutch turns on for 0.7 s and off for 1.3 s. 2-207-1 [K] [ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step ] 2-207-2 [Y] 0: Not execute 1: Execute 2-207-3 [M] 2-207-4 [C] 5-17 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 306 2-208-21 Img Coeff[C] Specifies each constant to adjust the toner supply amount. The optimum value is specified before shipment. 2-208-22 ImgCrctCoef[Bk] *BCU [ 0 to 10.0 / 0.1 / 0.1 %/step ] DFU 2-208-23 ImgCrctCoef[Y] 2-208-24 ImgCrctCoef[M] 2-208-25 ImgCrctCoef[C] B147/B149/B190 5-18...
  • Page 307 When toner is insufficient, the average is a larger value (“1” or its vicinity). 2-212-12 sensor avg [K] *BCU [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0.01/step ] 2-212-13 sensor avg [Y] 2-212-14 sensor avg [M] 2-212-15 sensor avg [C] 5-19 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 308 Activates or deactivates the Toner Fill Up mode, which fills up the toner supply tube with toner during developer initialization. This function is required only at machine installation. Although the default is “0”, the factory setting is “1”. After toner fill-up occurs during machine installation, the setting is changed to “0” automatically. B147/B149/B190 5-20...
  • Page 309 [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µA/step ] 2-301- [FC,K]B S 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 µA/step ] 2-301-25 [FC,K]B S 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 13 / 1 µA/step ] 5-21 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 310 [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µA/step ] 2-301-71 [FC,M]SP D125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µA/step ] 2-301-72 [FC,C]SP D125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µA/step ] B147/B149/B190 5-22...
  • Page 311 • SP2-402-2 validates the setting of SP2-402-1, but does not affect the setting of SP2-402-3. 2-402-3 Bk Mode Posit *BCU [ 0 to 500 / 130 / 10/step ] DFU Adjusts the transfer belt position for monochrome printing. SP2-402-3 is always valid regardless of the setting in SP2-402-2. 5-23 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 312 *BCU [ 1.0 to 4.0 / 2.0 / 0.1/step ] 2-802-5 OHP LT SEF *BCU [ 1.0 to 4.0 / 2.4 / 0.1/step ] 2-802-6 OHP A5 SEF *BCU [ 1.0 to 4.0 / 4.0 / 0.1/step ] B147/B149/B190 5-24...
  • Page 313 [ 0 to 20000 / 2881 / 1 dot ] DFU 2-919 [Main Scan Lgth Det] Main-scan Length Detection Enables or disables the main-scan length detection. 2-919-1 MScan Lgth D *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 1 / - ] Alphanumeric 0: Disable 1: Enable 5-25 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 314 When the line position adjustment fails, it is one of possible causes when the mirror position motor locks. Performing this SP mode can move the mirrors back to the original position if it locks. Then, do the forced line position adjustment (SP5-993- 002). 2-995-1 Motor Reset *BCU B147/B149/B190 5-26...

  • Page 315: Sp3-Xxx (Process)

    [ 0 to 240 / - / 0.1/step ] 3-007-2 [Y] *BCU 3-007-3 [M] *BCU 3-007-4 [C] *BCU 3-008 [Humidity] 3-008-1 Humidity *BCU [ 0 to 100 / - / 1/step ] Displays the humidity measured by the humidity/temperature sensor. 5-27 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 316 3-122 [Vk Display] Vk Display ([Color]) Displays the current Vk value. 3-122-1 [K] *BCU [ -255 to 255 / - / 1 V/step ] 3-122-2 [Y] *BCU Normal Range: -50 to 50 3-122-3 [M] *BCU 3-122-4 [C] *BCU B147/B149/B190 5-28...
  • Page 317 003. In addition, if SP 3-125-5 is set to 1, the auto toner density adjustment is done when the temperature and humidity meet specified conditions (same conditions as used for transfer current correction). Specify “1” when both temperature and humidity are both high or low. 5-29 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 318 3-904-5 CF [K] *BCU [ 0 to 1.00 / 0.13 / 0.01 mg/cm2 /step] DFU 3-904-6 CF [Y] *BCU [ 0 to 1.00 / 0.14 / 0.01 mg/cm2 /step] DFU 3-904-7 CF [M] *BCU 3-904-8 CF [C] *BCU B147/B149/B190 5-30...
  • Page 319 The counter is reset when the initial process control self-checks is done or when a print is made. 3-906-4 Non-use Time 2 *BCU [ 0 to 2550 / 480 / 10 minutes/step ] 0: Disable Specifies the executing timing of the non-use time process control self-check. 5-31 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 320 [Tonver Supply Time] Toner Supply Time Display ([Color]) Displays the toner supply clutch on time for the most recent page. 3-913-1 [K] *BCU [ 0 to 5000 / - / 10 ms/step ] 3-913-2 [Y] *BCU 3-913-3 [M] *BCU 3-913-4 [C] *BCU B147/B149/B190 5-32...
  • Page 321 This sometimes causes firefly spots or dirty background when a large amount of toner is supplied. NOTE: When enabling this SP mode, the following SP modes should be changed. SP3-906-001 Job End Process Control Self-check 200 (Default) -> 100 SP3-920-003 OPC Refresh Mode / Prints 200 (Default) -> 100 5-33 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 322 All colors are displayed. The results are displayed in the order “K Y C M” e.g., 1 1 9 1: The self-check for Cyan failed but the others were successful See the troubleshooting section for details 3-975-1 P Ctrl Result *BCU [ 0 to 9999 / - / 1/step ] B147/B149/B190 5-34...

  • Page 323: Sp4-Xxx (Scanner)

    Full color mode / Full Size / A3 or DLT Uses this SP mode to check if the F-Gate signal is properly generated (F-Gate tells the engine to start printing data). 4-017-1 Shading ON 4-017-2 Shading OFF 5-35 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 324 8: Color patch 16 (2) 9: Color patch 64 10: Grid pattern YMCK 11: Color patch YMCK 12: Gray pattern (1) 13: Gray pattern (2) 14: Gradation main scan2 15: Scanned + Grid pattern 16: Scanned + Gray scale B147/B149/B190 5-36...
  • Page 325 4-540-18 B:C 4-540-19 B:M 4-540-20 B:Y 4-540-21 M:K 4-540-22 M:C 4-540-23 M:M 4-540-24 M:Y 4-628 [R Gain Display] Gain Adjustment Red Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red. 4-628-1 R EVEN 4-628-2 R ODD 5-37 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 326 [Reference Adj.: G] Reference Adjustment Green DFU 4-686-1 Reference Adj.: G *BCU Do not change the setting. Use SP4-886. 4-687 [Reference Adj.: B] Reference Adjustment Blue DFU 4-687-1 Reference Adj.: B *CTL Do not change the setting. Use SP4-887. B147/B149/B190 5-38...
  • Page 327 4-903-1 This SP selects the level of the vertical line correction. The vertical line can occur while the ARDF is feeding the originals from the original tray. 0: Deactivated 1: Very low 2: Low 3: High 4: Very highl 5-39 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 328 Offset: Middle Offset: Shadow Offset: IDmax Adjusts the option data of the printer gamma for yellow in Photo mode. Option: Highlight *CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step ] DFU Option: Middle Option: Shadow Option: IDmax B147/B149/B190 5-40...
  • Page 329 4-932-3 B: Left 4-932-4 B: Right 4-999 [ADF Scan Glass Dust Check] 4-999-1 Check ON/OFF Change *CTL 0: OFF/1: ON) 4-999-2 Detect Level [ 0 to 8 / 5 / 1 /step ] 0: Lowest ←→ 8: Highest 5-41 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 330: Sp5-Xxx (Mode)

    Counter Up Timing *CTL [0: Feed/1: Exit] 5-121-1 This program specifies when the counter goes up. The settings refer to “paper feed” and “paper exit” respectively. 5-127 APS Mode *CTL [0: Not disabled/1: Disabled] 5-127-1 This program disables the APS. B147/B149/B190 5-42...
  • Page 331 5-302-2 Set Time *CTL [ -1440 to 1440 / 60 / 1 min./step ] 5-404 [User Code Counter Clear] Clear all counters for users. 5-404-1 UCodeCtrClr [0 to 1 / 1 / 0/step] 0: Not executed 1: Executed 5-43 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 332 Enables/disables the new call specifications designed to reduce the number of calls. 5-508-11* Jam Detection: Time Length [03~30 / 10 / 1] Sets the time a jam must remain before it becomes an “unattended paper jam”. This setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1. B147/B149/B190 5-44...
  • Page 333 Use this SP only after replacing the NVRAM, or after the copier has malfunctioned due to a damaged NVRAM. 5-801-2 ENG All Initializes items 2 ~ 12 below. 5-801-3 SCS Clears the system settings. 5-801-4 IMH Memory Clr Clears IMH data. DFU 5-45 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 334 [SC Detection ON/OFF] SC Detection ON/OFF Enable or disables the service call detection (SC codes will be ignored if disabling this SP mode). 5-809-1 All *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric 0: Enable 1: Disable 5-809-2 Vib Motor B147/B149/B190 5-46...
  • Page 335 1: Enable 5-816-3 Function Flag 5-816-4 Communication Test Call 5-816-5 Device Information Call 5-816-6 Device Information Call Display Setting 5-816-7 SSL Disable 5-816-8 RCG Connect Timeout 5-816-9 RCG Write Timeout 5-816-10 RCG Read Timeout 5-816-11 Port 80 Enable 5-47 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 336 5-828-90 TELNET (0: OFF 1: ON) Validates or invalidates the Telnet protocol. 5-828-91 Web (0: OFF 1: ON) Enables or disables the Web operation. 5-828-115 SMB Computer Name Specifies the SMB computer name. 5-828-116 SMB Work Group Name Specifies the SMB workgroup name. B147/B149/B190 5-48...
  • Page 337 5-836-81 to 5-836-86, Stored document format The following 6 SP modes set Sets the default format for stored documents sent to the document management server via the MLB. Enabled only when optional MLB (Media Link Board) is installed 5-49 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 338 LAN. The number of channels available varies according to location. The default settings are set for the minimum end of the range for each area. Adjust the lower 4 bits to set the minimum number of channels. DFU Note: Do not change the setting B147/B149/B190 5-50...
  • Page 339 1: Full speed Adjusts the USB transfer rate. 5-844-2 Vendor ID *CTL Displays the vendor ID. DFU 5-844-3 Product ID *CTL Displays the product ID. DFU 5-844-4 Device Release Number *CTL Displays the development release version number. DFU 5-51 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 340 Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists Bit2 = 1 Sender password function exists Bit1 = 1 Function to link MK-1 user and Sender exists Bit0 = 1 Sender specification required (if set to 1, Bit6 is set to “0”) B147/B149/B190 5-52...
  • Page 341 Allows you to enter a search attribute other than the default organization name (o) for the LDAP server search. 5-846-74 LDAP Attribute (Organizational Allows you to enter a search attribute other than Unit) the default organization unit name (ou) for the LDAP server search. 5-53 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 342 0000: OFF 5-848-4 Access Control: User Directory (only Lower 4 bits) 5-848-5 Access Control: Delivery Input (only Lower 4 bits) 5-848-6 Access Control: Fax Control (only Lower 4 bits) 5-848-7 Access Ctrl: Comm. Log Fax (Lower 4 bits) B147/B149/B190 5-54...
  • Page 343 1:IC Card, 2:HDD Select “1” (IC Card) if an HDD unit is not installed in the machine, or if the HDD unit is temporarily out of service. The IC card can store only 4 MB so use the HDD selection. 5-55 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 344 5-859-2 Key 2 controller board. ( 5.3.1) 5-859-3 Key 3 [-9999999~9999999 / 0 / 1] 5-859-4 Key 4 5-859-5 Key 5 5-859-6 Key 6 5-859-7 Key 7 5-859-8 Key 8 5-859-9 Key 9 5-859-10 Key 10 B147/B149/B190 5-56...
  • Page 345 Ricoh Aficio 2232C Aficio2232C Ricoh Aficio 2238C Aficio2238C Savin C3324 C3324 Savin C3328 C3328 Gestetner DSc332 DSc332 Gestetner DSc338 DSc338 DSc332 DSc332 DSc338 DSc338 Infotec ISC 2432 ISC2432 Infotec ISC 2838 ISC2838 Lanier LD232c LD232c Lanier LD238c LD238c 5-57 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 346 5-990-1 All (Data List) 5-990-2 SP (Mode Data List) 5-990-3 User Program 5-990-4 Logging Data 5-990-5 Diagnostic Report 5-990-6 Non-Default 5-990-7 NIB Summary 5-990-8 Net File Log 5-990-21 Copier User Program 5-990-22 Scanner SP 5-990-23 Scanner User Program B147/B149/B190 5-58...
  • Page 347 1: Enabled Enables or disables the line position adjustment just before starting a color print job when the temperature differs by the amount specified in SP5-993-003 from the temperature when the machine woke up from energy saver mode. 5-59 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 348 Performs the main scan length detection when the polygon motor has operated consecutively for the time specified in this SP mode. 5-993-25 Drm Gear Phase *BCU [ 0 to 345 / 0 / 15 degrees/step] DFU Adjusts the phases of the black drum gear and the color drum gear. B147/B149/B190 5-60...
  • Page 349 5-994-2 Oil Supply Unit *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric 0: Enable 1: Disable NOTE: Use this mode as a temporary measure, only when the unit detection mechanism is defective. 5-61 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 350 0: Full Color 1: Single Color Selects the color mode for making a test print. 5-997-5 Resolution [0 to 2 / 1 / 1/step] Alphanumeric 0: 600x600 1: 1800x600 2: 1200x1200 Selects the resolution for making a test print. B147/B149/B190 5-62...
  • Page 351 5-999-2 PCU: Y ⇒ unit. You set “1: Enable” before installing a 5-999-3 PCU: M new unit. 5-999-4 PCU: C 5-999-5 Dev. U: Bk 5-999-6 Dev. U: Y 5-999-7 Dev. U: M 5-999-8 Dev. U: C 5-999-9 Fuser 5-63 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 352: Sp6-Xxx (Peripherals)

    *CTL [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm/step ] 6-016 [Original Size Priority] Original Size Detection Priority Specifies the original size for a size detected by the original sensor, since original sensors cannot recognize all sizes. B147/B149/B190 5-64...
  • Page 353 *BCU [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm/step ] 6-111-2 Booklet Fin [ -3.75 to 3.75 / 0. / 0.25 mm/step ] 6-112 [Fold Position] *BCU [ -3.75 to 3.75 / 0. / 0.25 mm/step ] 5-65 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 354 Specifies whether or not the optional multi-bin output tray is installed. When installing the multi-bin output tray, this SP mode should be set to “1”. 6-901-1 Multi Bin Set *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 0: Not installed 1: Installed B147/B149/B190 5-66...

  • Page 355: Sp7-Xxx (Data Log)

    [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ] 7-007-2 A3/DLT 7-007-3 Staple 7-101 [Print Count–Paper Size] Paper Size Counter Displays the counter values for each paper size. 7-101-5 A4 LEF *CTL [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ] 5-67 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 356 7-204-4 Tray 3 7-204-5 Tray 4 7-204-6 Duplex 7-205 [Total ADF Counter] Displays the total number of originals fed by the ARDF. 7-205-1 ADF Total Counter *CTL 7-206 [Staple Counter] 7-206-1 Normal Staple *CTL Displays the number of stapler operations. B147/B149/B190 5-68...
  • Page 357 7-504-3 Tray 1: ON *CTL 7-504-4 Tray 2: ON 7-504-5 Tray 3/LCT: ON 7-504-6 Tray 4: ON 7-504-8 Regist.: ON 7-504-9 External Tray: ON 7-504-10 Internal Tray: ON 7-504-11 Duplex: ON 7-504-12 Duplex Exit 1: ON 7-504-13 Duplex Exit 2: ON 5-69 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 358 7-505-5 Registration Sensor (On Check) 7-505-6 Relay Sensor (On Check) 7-505-7 Inverter Sensor (On Check) 7-505-53 Skew Correction Sensor (Off Check) 7-505-54 Interval Sensor (Off Check) 7-505-55 Registration Sensor (Off Check) 7-505-56 Relay Sensor (Off Check) 7-505-57 Inverter Sensor (Off Check) B147/B149/B190 5-70...
  • Page 359 Displays the 10 most recently detected original jams. 7-508-1 Latest *CTL 7-508-2 Latest-1 7-508-3 Latest-2 7-508-4 Latest-3 7-508-5 Latest-4 7-508-6 Latest-5 7-508-7 Latest-6 7-508-8 Latest-7 7-508-9 Latest-8 7-508-10 Latest-9 7-801 [ROM No./Firmware Version] Displays the version of each firmware 7-80-255 Firmware Version 5-71 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 360 Displays the number of sheets printed until the waste toner bottle becomes full or toner runs out. 7-803-29 S: Waste Toner *BCU [ 0 to 9999999 / - / 1 sheet/step ] 7-803-30 S: Toner [K] 7-803-31 S: Toner [Y] 7-803-32 S: Toner [M] B147/B149/B190 5-72...
  • Page 361 NOTE: The LCT is counted as the 3rd feed station. 7-804-1 Paper 7-804-2 PCU [K] 7-804-3 PCU [Y] 7-804-4 PCU [M] 7-804-5 PCU [C] 7-804-6 Dev. [K] 7-804-7 Dev. [Y] 7-804-8 Dev. [M] 7-804-9 Dev. [C] 7-804-10 Oil Supply 7-804-11 PF By-pass 7-804-12 PF Tray 1 5-73 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 362 7-816-5 Tray 4 7-816-6 Duplex 7-826 [MF Error Counter] Japan Only 7-826-1 Error Total 7-826-2 Error Staple 7-827 [MF Error Counter Clear] Japan Only 7-832 [Self-Diagnose Result Display] Displays the result of the diagnostics. 7-832-1 Diag. Result *CTL B147/B149/B190 5-74...
  • Page 363 ACC Counter *CTL [0 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step] 7-835-1 Copy ACC Displays the number of times ACC has been done. 7-835-2 Printer ACC 7-836 Total Memory Size Displays the memory capacity of the controller system. 5-75 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 364 7-906-17 R:Dev. [M] 7-906-18 R:Dev. [C] 7-906-19 R:Oil Supply 7-906-20 R:Fusing Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance unit or toner cartridge. 7-906-21 S:Waste Toner *BCU [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ] B147/B149/B190 5-76...
  • Page 365 7-906-30 R(%): Dev [K] 7-906-31 R(%): Dev [Y] 7-906-32 R(%): Dev [M] 7-906-33 R(%): Dev [C] 7-906-34 R(%): Oil Supply 7-906-35 R(%): Fusing 7-907 [Check Sum] Displays the check sum of the firmware. 7-907-1 Engine Main *BCU 7-907-2 Engine MUSIC 5-77 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 366: Sp8-Xxx: Data Log2

    Each counter will be discussed case by case. Other applications Refers to network applications such as Web (external network Image Monitor. Utilities developed with the SDK applications, for (Software Development Kit) will also be counted example) with this group in the future. B147/B149/B190 5-78...
  • Page 367 Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that allows print jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers on the network, and allows files to moved around, combined, and converted to different formats. Currently not available. Personal Computer 5-79 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 368 Toner End TonSave Toner Save TXJob Send, Transmission Yellow, Magenta, Cyan YMCK Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black NOTE: All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear, or the Counter Reset SP7 808. B147/B149/B190 5-80...
  • Page 369 • When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counter increments. • When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counter increments. However, for fax reports and reports executed from the fax application, the F: counter increments. 5-81 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 370 • When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with a network application (Web Image Monitor, for example), the C: counter increments. • When a fax on the document server is printed, the F: counter increments. B147/B149/B190 5-82...
  • Page 371 The L: counter counts the number of jobs sent 8-057 O:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel. • If the send is started from Desk Top Binder or Web Image Monitor, for example, then the O: counter increments. 5-83 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 372 Number of jobs started In any mode other than the Booklet mode and set for folding (Z-fold). 8-06x 6 Punch Number of jobs started in Punch mode. When Punch is set for a print job, the P: counter increments. (See SP8 064 6.) 8-06x 7 Other Reserved. Not used. B147/B149/B190 5-84...
  • Page 373 • The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to the number of pages of the copy job (SP 8072). • When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the page is counted. 5-85 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 374 • The counters for color are provided for future use; the color fax feature is not available at this time. • The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is sent. B147/B149/B190 5-86...
  • Page 375 • If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled. • Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one job. 5-87 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 376 • These counters do not count reading user stamp data, or reading color charts to adjust color. • Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted. • A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned. • Scans made in SP mode are not counted. B147/B149/B190 5-88...
  • Page 377 • If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server, the C: count is 6 and the L: count is 6. • If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6. 5-89 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 378 • If the user selects “Mixed Sizes” for copying in the platen mode, the Mixed Size count is enabled. • In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2 pages with SADF, the Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3. B147/B149/B190 5-90...
  • Page 379 8-24x 8: Binary 8-24x 9: Grayscale 8-24x 10: Color • If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches from ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode. 5-91 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 380 S:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL The L: counter counts the number of pages 8-296 L:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen B147/B149/B190 5-92...
  • Page 381 8-30x 1 A3 8-30x 2 A4 8-30x 3 A5 8-30x 4 B4 8-30x 5 B5 8-30x 6 DLT 8-30x 7 LG 8-30x 8 LT 8-30x 9 HLT 8-30x 10 Full Bleed 8-30x 254 Other (Standard) 8-30x 255 Other (Custom) 5-93 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 382 8-31x 3 400dpi~599dpi 8-31x 4 200dpi~399dpi 8-31x 5 ~199dpi • Copy resolution settings are fixed so they are not counted. • The Fax application does not allow finely-adjusted resolution settings so no count is done for the Fax application. B147/B149/B190 5-94...
  • Page 383 • Reports printed to confirm counts. • All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine maintenance reports, etc.) • Test prints for machine image adjustment. • Error notification reports. • Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam. 5-95 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 384 [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] • Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the L: count. • Fax jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the F: count. B147/B149/B190 5-96...
  • Page 385 ISO standards for the reduction of paper consumption. • Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1 page. • Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes: 5-97 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 386 8-43x 2 Series/Book The number of pages printed in series (one side) or printed as a book with booklet right/left pagination. 8-43x 3 User Stamp The number of pages printed where stamps were applied, including page numbering and date stamping. B147/B149/B190 5-98...
  • Page 387 8-44x 4 B4 8-44x 5 B5 8-44x 6 DLT 8-44x 7 LG 8-44x 8 LT 8-44x 9 HLT 8-44x 10 Full Bleed 8-44x 254 Other (Standard) 8-44x 255 Other (Custom) • These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF. 5-99 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 388 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed from within the document server mode window at the operation panel. 8-46x 1 Normal 8-46x 2 Recycled 8-46x 3 Special 8-46x 4 Thick 8-46x 5 Normal (Back) 8-46x 6 Thick (Back) 8-46x 7 OHP 8-46x 8 Other B147/B149/B190 5-100...
  • Page 389 8-49x 4 Full Color 8-501 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL These SPs count the number of pages printed in the Color Mode by the print application. 8-504 P:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL 8-50x 1 B/W 8-50x 2 Single Color 8-50x 3 Full Color 5-101 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 390 8-514 13 BM-Links Japan Only 8-514 14 Other • SP8 511 and SP8 514 return the same results as they are both limited to the Print application. • Print jobs output to the document server are not counted. B147/B149/B190 5-102...
  • Page 391 2) The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so jam recoveries are counted. 8-531 Staples *CTL This SP counts the amount of staples used by the machine. [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] 5-103 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 392 8-584 3 Full Color 8-586 L:Counter *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the total output of the local storage broken down by color output. 8-582 1 B/W 8-582 2 Single Color 8-582 3 Two Color 8-582 4 Full Color B147/B149/B190 5-104...
  • Page 393 • If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission, the count is done for each destination. • Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not. • Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each destination. 5-105 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 394 • If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission, the count is done for each destination. • Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not. • Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each destination. B147/B149/B190 5-106...
  • Page 395 For example, if a 10-page document is sent to 200 addresses, the count is 10 for the first 100 destinations and the count is also 10 for the second 100 destinations, for a total of 20.). 5-107 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 396 Scan application. 8-676 L:Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with Scan- to-PC function with the LS applications. 8-67x 1 B/W 8-67x 2 Color B147/B149/B190 5-108...
  • Page 397 RX PGS/Port *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical port used to receive them. 8-741 1 PSTN-1 8-741 2 PSTN-2 8-741 3 PSTN-3 8-741 4 ISDN (G3,G4) 8-741 5 Network 5-109 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 398 8-831 4 Average [C] 8-841 Coverage *BCU [0~100/ 0 / 1] These SPs display the coverage of the last print by color. ( SP 7-833) 8-841 1 Last [BK] 8-841 2 Last [Y] 8-841 3 Last [M] 8-841 4 Last [C] B147/B149/B190 5-110...
  • Page 399 [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs display the number of sheet output by the scan application with the previously replaced units. 8-901 1 S: Toner [BK] 8-901 2 S: Toner [Y] 8-901 3 S: Toner [M] 8-901 4 S: Toner [C] 5-111 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 400 8-951 8 Fax Program Fax application registrations with the Program (job settings) feature. 8-951 9 Printer Program Printer application registrations with the Program (job settings) feature. 8-951 10 Scanner Scanner application registrations Program with the Program (job settings) feature. B147/B149/B190 5-112...
  • Page 401 Serial number information • SP modes related to meter charge • Counters and logging data 5-998-2 ENG Counter All counters and logging data related to engine 7-808 [Counter Clear] 7-808-1 Counter Clear SP7-101, 204, 209, 502, 504, 506, and 507 5-113 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 402: Input Check Table

    Upper Relay Sensor (PFU) Paper not detected Paper detected Lower Relay Sensor (PFU) Paper not detected Paper detected Registration Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected Duplex Inverter Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected Duplex Feed Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected B147/B149/B190 5-114...
  • Page 403 Not contact Contact Used Toner Sensor Not full Full Used Toner Bottle Set Sensor Not set Drum Gear Position Sensor - K Activated Deactivated (Actuator inside sensor) Drum Gear Position Sensor - CMY Activated Deactivated (Actuator inside sensor) 5-115 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 404: Ardf Input Check: Sp6-007

    (Not used) — — (Not used) — — 0 Original length sensor 3* Paper not detected Paper detected NOTE: The original length sensors detect the following paper sizes: B5 (sensor 1), LG (sensor 2), and A4 (sensor 3). B147/B149/B190 5-116...

  • Page 405: Table 1: Paper Height Sensor

    11" x 17" SEF 11" x 17" SEF A3 SEF A3 SEF B4 SEF " x 11" SEF A4 SEF 8" x 13" SEF F SEF A5 SEF " x 18 " SEF B6 SEF Post Card Post Card 5-117 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 406: Table 4: Original Size Detection

    Length Sensor Sensor display A4/A3 version LT/DLT version 11" x 17" 10" x 14" 8.5" x 14" (8" x 13") A4-L 8.5" x 11" B5-L A4-S 11" x 8.5" B5-S A5-L, A5-S 5.5" x 8.5", 8.5" x 5.5" B147/B149/B190 5-118...

  • Page 407: Output Check Table

    Air Pump Motor and Valve for Magenta 5-804-42 Air Supply [C] Air Pump Motor and Valve for Cyan 5-804-43 Air Supply [K] Air Pump Motor and Valve for Black 5-804-44 T End Sens [Y] Toner End Sensor - Y 5-119 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 408 Development AC Bias for Color - 185 mm/s 5-804-108 Dev AC [K] 185 Development AC Bias for Black - 185 mm/s 5-804-109 Transfer [Y] Transfer Current for Yellow 5-804-110 Transfer [M] Transfer Current for Magenta 5-804-111 Transfer [C] Transfer Current for Cyan B147/B149/B190 5-120...
  • Page 409 Optional Paper Feed Unit (PSU: Paper Supply Unit) / Motor 5-804-166 PF CL PFU (1) Paper Feed Clutch / Optional Paper Feed Unit / Tray 1 5-804-167 PF CL PFU (2) Paper Feed Clutch / Optional Paper Feed Unit / Tray 2 5-121 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 410 Duplex Inverter Motor 1&2 / 450 / Clockwise 5-804-205 PF M 125CCW Duplex Feed Motor / 125 / Counterclockwise 5-804-206 PF M 230CCW Duplex Feed Motor / 230 / Counterclockwise 5-804-207 PF M 370CCW Duplex Feed Motor / 370 / Counterclockwise B147/B149/B190 5-122...

  • Page 411: Test Pattern (Sp5-997)

    19. Belt pattern (Vertical) 20. Checkered Flag 21. Grey scale (Vertical) SP5-997-005 Selects the resolution. 22. Grey scale (Horizontal) 23. Solid Selects the desired Tray or by-pass By-pass SP5-997-006 paper size. Tray SP5-997-007 Prints the test pattern. B146S913.WMF 5-123 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 412: Printer Service Mode

    Selects the printing mode (resolution) for the printer gamma adjustment. 1-102-1 1200x1200 Photo, 1800x600 Photo, 600 x 600 Photo, 1200x1200 Text, 1800x600, Text, 600x600 Text [Test Page] 1-103 Prints the test page to check the color balance before and after the gamma adjustment. B147/B149/B190 5-124...
  • Page 413 [Toner Limit] Adjusts the maximum toner amount for image development. 1-106-1 Toner Limit: Photo *CTL [ 100 to 400 / 260 / 1 %/step ] 1-106-2 Toner Limit: Text [ 100 to 400 / 190 / 1 %/step ] 5-125 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 414: Scanner Sp Mode

    If the machine has scanned the edge of the original, create a margin. 1-005-1 Erase Margin [0 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step ] 1-007 [Store Priority] [1: Send/2: Store Only/3: Send & Store] 1-007-1 This program specifies how scanned data is processed as default. B147/B149/B190 5-126...

  • Page 415: Sp2-Xxx (Scanning-Image Quality)

    [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU 2-002-30 Notch No.1: (Darker): Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU 2-002-31 Notch No.1: (Darker): Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU 5-127 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 416 [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU 2-003-30 Notch No.1: (Darker): Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU 2-003-31 Notch No.1: (Darker): Threshold [ 0 to -255 / 110 / 1/step ] DFU B147/B149/B190 5-128...
  • Page 417 [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU 2-004-30 Notch No.1: (Darker): Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU 2-004-31 Notch No.1: (Darker): Threshold [ 0 to -255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU 5-129 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 418 [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU 2-005-30 Notch No.1: (Darker): Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU 2-005-31 Notch No.1: (Darker): Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU B147/B149/B190 5-130...
  • Page 419 [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU 2-006-30 Notch No.1: (Darker): Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU 2-006-31 Notch No.1: (Darker): Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU 5-131 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 420 [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU 2-007-37 Notch No.5: B - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU 2-007-38 Notch No.4(Middle): R - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU B147/B149/B190 5-132...
  • Page 421 [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU 2-007-72 Notch No. 1(Darker): G - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU 2-007-73 Notch No. 1(Darker): B - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU 5-133 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 422 [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU 2-008-37 Notch No.5: B - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU 2-008-38 Notch No.4 (Middle): R - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU B147/B149/B190 5-134...
  • Page 423 [ 5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step ] 2-021-2 Compression ratio (High quality image) [ 5 to 95 / 60 / 1 /step ] 2-021-3 Compression ratio (Low-quality image) [ 5 to 95 / 40 / 1 /step ] 5-135 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 424 This program specifies the color difference for each image density level. ⇒ 2-022-7 Adjustment value of threshold [ -127 to 127 / -110 / 1 /step ] NOTE: Requires System firmware v1.21 or newer. This menu specifies the threshold of the auto-color sensing feature. B147/B149/B190 5-136...

  • Page 425: Reboot / System Setting Reset

    NOTE: You must press  first. B146S914.WMF 3. When the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the system settings, press Yes. 4. When the message tells you that the settings have been reset, press Exit. 5-137 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 426: Copier Setting Reset

    NOTE: You must press  first. B146S915.WMF 3. When the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the Copier Document Server settings, press “Yes”. 4. When the message tells you that the settings have been reset, press “Exit”. B147/B149/B190 5-138...

  • Page 427: Firmware Update

    LANG.2 (16 languages) selected from 16 languages. Document server Flash ROM on the Web Document Box WebDocBox application controller board Web Service application Flash ROM on the Web Support WebSys controller board SG3-PRE1 Optional G3 fax control SG3DREI-1 5-139 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 428: Before You Begin

    1. If the SD card is blank, copy the entire “romdata” folder onto the SD card. 2. If the card already contains the “romdata” folder, copy the “B149” folder onto the card. 3. If the card already contains folders up to “B149”, simply copy the necessary firmware files (e.g. B149xxxx.fwu) into this folder. B147/B149/B190 5-140...
  • Page 429 Press this button on the touch-screen (or  on the 10-key pad) to open Language Data (2) the language update screen. Press this key on the touch-screen (or  on the 10-key pad) to quit the Exit (0) update procedure and return to normal machine operation. 5-141 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 430 9. On the screen, touch the button or press the corresponding number key on the operation panel to select the item in the menu that you want to update. B147/B149/B190 5-142...
  • Page 431 Press this button (or ) to verify the selected module. Verify (./*) Press this button (or ) to upgrade the selected module. Update(#) Press this button (or ) to return to the previous screen. Exit(0) 11. To start the update, touch “UpDate (#)” (or ). 5-143 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 432 The first line prompts you that the update is finished, and the second line tells you the name of the module that has just been updated. NOTE: If you have selected more than one module for updating, only the screen for the last module updated will be displayed. B147/B149/B190 5-144...
  • Page 433 PCcard -> ROM No Valid Data Exit(0) B146S921.WMF The error code consists of the letter “E” and a number. The example above shows error “E24” displayed. For details, refer to the Error Message Table. ( 5.6.8) 5-145 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 434: Firmware Update Error

    ROM update error will continue to be displayed until the ROM is updated successfully. In this case, just insert the card once again and switch on the machine to continue the firmware download automatically from the card without the menu display. B147/B149/B190 5-146...

  • Page 435: Verifying A Successful Update

    4. Press “Firmware (1)” to open the firmware update screen. PCcard -> ROM Page01 ROM: G0000000 NEW: G0000000 Printer ROM: 0.01 NEW: 0.0X ROM: B0705254 NEW: B0705254 Engine ROM: 2.16:16 NEW: 2.16:16 OpePanel.DOM ROM: B0705370 NEW: B0705370 ROM: 1.22 NEW: 2.00 Exit(0) B146S924.WMF 5-147 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 436 9. When you see the “Verify Done” message, switch the copier main power switch off. 10. Press in the SD card to release it, then remove it from the slot. 11. Switch the copier on for normal operation. B147/B149/B190 5-148...
  • Page 437 Printer Card No.: 1/1 B146S926.WMF The second line tells you the name of the module where the error was detected. If an error occurs during verification, switch the printer off and download the firmware from the SD card again. 5-149 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 438: Updating The Lcdc For The Operation Panel

    0.5 s intervals. When the update is finished, the same key starts flashing in green at 1 s intervals. 7. Switch the copier main power switch off, remove the SD card, then switch the copier on again. B147/B149/B190 5-150...

  • Page 439: Downloading Stamp Data

    The download is finished with the message prompts you to close. Processing finished. Switch on the main power switch. Note: May re-set automatically. Close B146S929.WMF 3. Press the “Close” button then cycle the copier off and on again. 5-151 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 440: Nvram Data Upload/Download

    SD card must match the serial number of the machine. If the serial numbers do not match, the download will fail. This procedure downloads the following data to the NVRAM: • Total Count • C/O, P/O Count B147/B149/B190 5-152...

  • Page 441: Installing Another Language

    Touch this button on the screen (or press  on the 10-key pad) to open the next LANG. 1(2) screen so you can select the 2nd language. Touch this key on the screen (or press  on the 10-key pad) to quit the update Exit(0) procedure and return to normal screen. 5-153 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 442 If a language is already selected, it will be displayed in reverse. Touching “Exit(0)” also returns the previous screen. 8. If you do not see the language that you want to select, touch “↑(7)” or “↓(9)” on the screen (or press  or ) to display more choices. B147/B149/B190 5-154...
  • Page 443 • The LED on the power on key flashes rapidly. 10. After the Start LED begins to flash slowly, switch the copier main power switch off, then remove the SD card from the slot. 11. Switch the copier main power switch on to resume normal operation. 5-155 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 444: Handling Firmware Update Errors

    Replace the update data for the module on the SD failed card and tray again, or replace controller board. Electronic confirmation check SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD failed card is for another machine. Acquire correct update data then install again. B147/B149/B190 5-156...

  • Page 445: Sd Card Appli Move

    SD card and its data to solve a problem in the future. 4. You cannot copy PostScript data to another SD card. You have to copy another data to the SD card that stores PostScript data. 5-157 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 446: Move Exec

    7. Follow the messages displayed on the operation panel. 8. Turn the main switch off. 9. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 3. 10. Turn the main switch on. 11. Check that the application programs run normally. B147/B149/B190 5-158...

  • Page 447: Undo Exec

    10. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 3 and insert it to SD Card Slot 1. NOTE: This step assumes that the application programs in the SD card are used by the machine. 11. Turn the main switch on. 12. Check that the application programs run normally. 5-159 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 448: Controller Self-Diagnostics

    Error Logged Real Time Clock SC826 Detailed Check Real Time Clock Check SC826 Font ROM Sum Check Network Check Error Logged Error Logged Engine I/F Check Error Logged Interrupt Check Error Logged Memory Chip Check Error Logged B146S933.WMF B147/B149/B190 5-160...

  • Page 449: Detailed Self-Diagnostics

    • Refer to the diagnostics report for the detected errors. The errors detected during self-diagnostics can be checked with SP7-832-001 (Diag. Result). • Refer to section 4.2 for details about the error codes. 5-161 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 450: User Program Mode

    • E-mail Account • System Auto Reset Timer • Program/Change LDAP • Copier/Document Server Server Auto Reset Timer • User LDAP Server • Facsimile Auto Reset Timer • Scanner Auto Reset Timer • Set Date • Set Time B147/B149/B190 5-162...
  • Page 451 • Front Cover Copy in • Two Color Mode Priority Combine • Auto Image Density • Copy Order in Combine Priority • Image Repeat Separation Line • Double Copies Separation Line • Separation Line in Combine • Orientation Magazine 5-163 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 452: Facsimile Features

    • Extend A4 Width • PS Configuration/Font • Page Size • Append CR to LF Page • Letterhead Setting • Resolution • Hex Dump Host Interface Maintenance • I/O Buffer • Menu Protect • I/O Timeout • 4 Color Graphic Mode B147/B149/B190 5-164...

  • Page 453: Scanner Features

    • Original Orientation Priority • Divide & Send E-mail • Change Initial Mode • E-mail Information Language • Auto Color Select: Mode Priority • Sender's Name Default • A.C.S. Sensitivity Level (Language) — Inquiry Print Inquiry List Counter Print Counter List 5-165 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 454: Display

    For the list of the menus and submenus, see section 5.9.1, “Menu.” Inquiry The menu “Inquiry” displays the information specified by the corresponding SPs: Information Specified by Consumables Telephone number to order SP5-812-003 Machine maintenance/Repair Telephone number SP5-812-001 Sales representative Telephone number SP5-812-004 B147/B149/B190 5-166...

  • Page 455: Dip Switches

    Boot-up from flash Boot-up from IC card 2 to 4 Factory Use Only: Keep these switches OFF. BCU Board Set the DIP switch on the BCU as listed in the table. DIP Switch Model B147/B190 B149 North/South America Europe Asia Taiwan Korea When the DIP switch is incorrectly set, one of the following error occurs: •...
  • Page 457 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS...

  • Page 459: Detailed Section Descriptions

    8. Scanner motor Duplex feed unit 9. Exposure glass Transfer belt cleaning unit 10. Sensor board unit (SBU) ID sensor Toner cartridge Development unit (each color) Laser optics housing unit PCU (each color) Polygon mirror motor Fusing unit By-pass feed table B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 460: Paper Path

    When the one-tray paper feed unit is installed, paper feeds out to the two-tray finisher from the upper exit. When the two-tray paper feed unit or LCT is installed, paper feeds out to the two-tray finisher from the lower exit. B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 461 Drives the black PCU and the collection coil in the waste toner bottle. 8. Transfer unit drive Drives the transfer unit. motor: 9. Waste toner vibration Makes vibration to prevent the waste toner from clogging the waste motor: toner path. B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 462: Board Structure

    Duplex unit Develop. motors Standard motors component Duplex unit Optional Drum motors solenoid component B146D913.WMF * The SD card (printer/scanner), the IEEE 1284 interface, and the Ethernet interface are optional components for the Asia model. B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 463: Descriptions

    The Sensor Board Unit has a CCD (charge-coupled device) and an analog-to- digital conversion circuit. Operation Panel Board: Controls the display panel, the LED, and the keypad. Motherboard: The motherboard is the main circuit board connecting with the BCU, FCU, controller, IPU, and main power supply unit. B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 464: Printing Process

    From the left, the PCU stations are black, yellow, cyan, and magenta. A transfer belt feeds paper past the PCUs, and the toner image on each drum is transferred to the paper. The paper path is inclined about 38 degrees to make the machine as compact as possible. B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 465 The ID sensor board contains three ID sensors (one at the front, center, and rear). The ID sensor detects the density of the ID sensor pattern on the transfer belt. The ID sensor output is used for process control and for automatic line position, skew, and color registration adjustments for the latent image. B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 466: Process Control

    If SP3-125-1 is set to 0 (Off), the machine does not do the potential control, but uses the development bias adjusted with SP2-201-1 to -9, the charge roller voltage adjusted with SP2-001-1 to -9, and the laser power selected with SP2-103-1 to -27. However, these SPs should normally not be adjusted in the field. B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 467: Process Control Self Check

    This starts after recovery from a toner end condition. 7. After Developer Initialization The machine executes the Auto Toner Density Adjustment (SP3-125-003). This starts after a developer initialization is done. Developer initialization occurs automatically after a new development unit has been installed. B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 468: Process Control Self Check Procedure

    ID sensor until its output (known as V ) is as follows. • V = 4.0 ± 0.5 Volts This calibration compensates for the transfer belt's condition and the ID sensor condition, such as dirt on the surface of the belt or ID sensor. B147/B149/B190 6-10...

  • Page 469: Step 2: Id Sensor Solid Pattern Generation

    The amount of toner on the transfer belt (M/A, mass per unit area, mg/cm ) is calculated for each of the 10 grades of the sensor pattern from the ID sensor output value from each grade of the pattern. 6-11 B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 470 • Interval (Job End/ Non-use Time/ During Toner End Recovery): ± 40 volts • Interval (Interrupt): Constant (The memory table is not used.) Steps 6 to 8 are carried out only if SP3-125-2 is set to 2. (Default: Steps 6 to 8 are not used) B147/B149/B190 6-12...

  • Page 471: Step 6: Id Sensor Highlight Pattern Generation

    The machine determines the relationship between the amount of toner on the transfer belt and the laser power for each of the 10 grades. The machine now selects the laser power to get the target M/A. Target LD Power B146D505.WMF 6-13 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 472: Vref Compensation During A Print Job

    The machine generates a highlight pattern (just one grade) of a specified density. The center ID sensor checks the density and the machine adjusts V comparing the reading with the target of each color (SP3-905-1 to 4). When this adjustment is not sufficient, the machine adjusts V too. B147/B149/B190 6-14...

  • Page 473: Toner Supply Control

    SP2-224-5 to -8. 3. Fixed supply mode This mode is used when the TD sensor becomes faulty. The amount of toner supply can be adjusted with SP2-208-5 to -8 if the image density is incorrect (the default setting is 5%). 6-15 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 474: Toner Near End/Toner End Detection

    “Toner Near End Detection 1” and “Toner Near End Detection 2”). If either of these detect near end, the machine enters the near-end condition. Toner End To determine the toner end status, the controller considers the following information: • TD sensor [A] in the development unit • Pixel counter B147/B149/B190 6-16...

  • Page 475: Toner Near End Detection 1

    “Xxxxx” indicates the color, such as cyan. b) If the signals indicate the toner amount is not less than a certain level, the controller decides that the machine is not in the toner near end status. The machine resumes its normal operation. 6-17 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 476: Toner End Detection

    The machine then starts to supply toner to the development unit. After supplying toner, the machine clears the toner near-end or end status if the following conditions are detected. • Vt [0] – Vt [3] > 0.5V • Vt – Vref > 0.3V B147/B149/B190 6-18...

  • Page 477: Developer Initialization

    SP2-224-1 to -4 (adjust by trial and error). During developer initialization, the machine forcibly supplies toner because there is no toner inside the toner transport tube at installation. Then the machine does the process control self check. B146D903.WMF 6-19 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 478: Overview

    When the original is fed from the optional ARDF, it is automatically transported onto the ARDF exposure glass, and to the original exit. The original does not stay on the glass, but keeps going to the exit. The 1st and 2nd scanners stay at their home positions. B147/B149/B190 6-20...

  • Page 479: Scanner Drive

    ARDF motor speed. Magnification in the main scan direction is done in the IPU board, like for book mode. Magnification in the sub-scan direction can be adjusted by changing the ARDF motor speed using SP6-017 6-21 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 480: Original Size Detection

    • If the copy is made with the platen cover fully open, the SBU controller on the SBU determines the original size from the sensor outputs after the Start key is pressed. L1 L2 B146D509.WMF B147/B149/B190 6-22...

  • Page 481: Anti-Condensation Heater

    The anti-condensation heater is available as an optional unit. The anti- condensation heater prevents condensation on the mirrors, which may occur when the scanner unit is, for example, carried from a cold room to a warm room. Such condensation can cause abnormal images. 6-23 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 482: Overview

    • The SBU (Sensor Board Unit) converts the three analog signals to 10-bit digital signals. It sends these signals to the IPU (Image Processing Unit). • The IPU processes the image, then the image data is sent to the controller. B147/B149/B190 6-24...

  • Page 483: Sbu Block Diagram

    To compensate the difference between the actual white level and the ideal white level (target white level), the CCD-gain control is conducted. Others The SBU controller exchanges the R and B signals if the original is scanned by using ARDF. 6-25 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 484: Black Level Correction

    After replacing the SBU, adjust the following: SP4–008 Scanner sub-scan magnification SP4–010 Scanner leading edge registration SP4–011 Scanner side-to-side registration VPU Test Mode To make sure the scanner VPU control is functioning, output the VPU test pattern with SP4-907. ( “4. Troubleshooting” for details) B147/B149/B190 6-26...

  • Page 485: Ipu Block Diagram

    Controller Option B146D931.WMF Shading Correction Auto shading compensates for the possible differences in the amount of light at the edge and center of a scanned image caused by the scanner lens, or variations among pixels of the CCD. 6-27 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 486: Picture Element (Dot Position) Correction

    • If white pixels are not detected around non-white pixels, it is a dot screen area. Colored Text Separation • Identifies whether the text area’s pixels are black or color. • Based on: 1) Differences among the RGB maximum signal levels. 2) Output levels of the RGB video signals. B147/B149/B190 6-28...

  • Page 487: Acs (Auto Color Select)

    Selection is made based on the difference between the RGB signal levels. RGB video signals are compared. If the maximum difference among RGB signals is within a certain range, the original is considered black and white. 6-29 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 488: Scanner Gamma Correction (Rgb Gamma Correction)

    • The IPU section converts the signal levels as shown in Fig. 2. • This improves the accuracy of RGB to CMY color conversion (conversion is done later in the image process). • The same table is used for R, G, and B signals. B147/B149/B190 6-30...

  • Page 489: Filtering

    3) Removes the peak white level from the image. This produces a white background. 4) Also uses the peak white level to determine the white reference value for A/D conversion. 5) Background density is adjusted before data is input to the A/D converter. 6-31 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 490: Color Conversion

    Two-color mode • Separates black areas and colored areas. • Converts black areas to a color selected by the user. • All other areas are converted to a second color selected by the user. the operator's manual for details) B147/B149/B190 6-32...

  • Page 491: Main Scan Magnification

    • The calculated data then becomes the new (reduced or enlarged) image data. NOTE: The actual calculations for main scan magnification use the polynomial convolution method. This mathematical process is beyond the scope of a service manual and will not be covered here. 6-33 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 492: Printer Gamma Correction

    This is deliberate, since some drift is expected. After a time, the original factory settings may no longer be suitable. • Factory settings can be overwritten by the current gamma settings using SP5- 610-5. B147/B149/B190 6-34...
  • Page 493 C-4 test chart (figure 5). Fig. 5 B146D518.WMF Highlight (Low ID) The Low ID mode adjusts the image density between Level 2 and Level 5 of the color gradation scale on the C-4 test chart (figure Fig. 6 B146D519.WMF 6-35 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 494: Error Diffusion

    Each pixel is corrected using the difference between it and the surrounding pixels. The corrected pixels are then compared with an error diffusion matrix. IPU Board Test You can check the IPU board with the SP mode menu, SP4-904-1 or 2. “4. Troubleshooting” for details) B147/B149/B190 6-36...

  • Page 495: Copier Application

    Controller → IPU (through) → Controller → BCU Scanner Application (1 bit/8 bits) SBU → IPU → Controller (HDD/Memory) Fax Application (Transmission/Reception) Transmission: SBU → IPU → FCU Reception: FCU → IPU → Controller (straight through) → BCU 6-37 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 496: Laser Exposure

    Laser exposure for magenta and cyan starts from the rear side of the drum, but for yellow and black it starts from the front side of the drum. This is because the units for magenta and cyan are on the other side of the polygon mirror from the units for yellow and black. B147/B149/B190 6-38...

  • Page 497: Optical Path

    1,800 x 600 Dual beam OHP/Thick writing 1,200 x 1,200 29,528 paper) Color 600 x 600 29,528 1,800 x 600 (except OHP/Thick 1,200 x 1,200 29,528 62.5 paper) 600 x 600 OHP/Thick 1,800 x 600 29,528 62.5 1,200 x 1,200 6-39 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 498: Laser Synchronizing Detector

    If the count for one particular beam varies from normal, the LD clock frequency for that beam is adjusted. If the board at the end position is defective, this cannot be detected. In such case, you must disable the detection feature with SP2-919-1. B147/B149/B190 6-40...

  • Page 499: Dual Beam Writing

    [C] is out of the sensor. The 600-dpi and 1,200-dpi positions are determined by the distance from the home position. The distance is calculated from the operation time of the LD positioning motor. 6-41 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 500: Printing Mode And Black Ld Unit Position

    600-dpi position Monochrome 1,200 dpi 1,200-dpi position 600 dpi 600-dpi position Color 1,200 dpi 600-dpi position After the laser optics housing unit has been replaced, the beam pitch for 600 dpi and 1,200 dpi must be adjusted (SP2-109-2, -3). B147/B149/B190 6-42...

  • Page 501: Ld Safety Switch

    The micro switch [A] on the PSU is activated or deactivated by the actuator LDB (Y) CN224-3 CN401-48 (Y) [B] when the front cover or the upper left CN224-2 CN401-49 (Y) cover is opened and closed. E-MAC B146D923.WMF B146D526.WMF 6-43 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 502: Error Messages

    Right door Closed (any) Closed Open NOTE: 1) In the table, “any” indicates the condition does not affect the diagram indication. 2) The left door switch [D] is closed when the upper left cover switch [A] is closed. B147/B149/B190 6-44...

  • Page 503: Automatic Line Position Adjustment

    • Main scan line position for KYCM • Magnification ratio for KYCM • Skew for YCM After the patterns are measured, the transfer belt cleaning unit cleans the transfer belt. If an error is detected three times consecutively, SC285 is generated. 6-45 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 504: Summary Of Each Adjustment

    Magnification adjustment for KYCM If the machine detects that magnification adjustment is necessary, it changes the LD clock frequency for the required color. Skew for YCM The adjustment of the skew for YCM is based on the line position for K. B147/B149/B190 6-46...

  • Page 505: Adjustment Conditions

    2) Fusing temperature is measured by the thermistor in the fusing unit. Other temperature is measured by the sensors on the laser optics housing unit. 3) You can use SP5-993-035 to select one of the three frequency levels of color adjustment. 6-47 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 506: Main Scan Skew Adjustment

    1 bit / pixel LD control SP2-103-101 to -110 SP2-103-1 to -59 Pointer table display SP3-902-5 to -8 SP3-902-1 to -4 M/A target SP3-903-5 to -8 SP3-903-1 to -4 M/A target for LD correction SP3-904-5 to -8 SP3-904-1 to -4 B147/B149/B190 6-48...

  • Page 507: Photoconductor Unit

    The diameter of the drum is 30 mm (circumference: about 94.25 mm). The photoconductor gap between a PCU and the corresponding development roller is determined by the drum positioning plate and the rear shaft, and is not adjustable in the field. 6-49 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 508: Drive

    6.7.2 DRIVE G080D927.WMF The drum drive motor-K [A] drives the PCU for black. The drum drive motor-CMY [B] drives the PCUs for magenta, cyan, and yellow. Using one motor to drive these three drums reduces CMY color misalignment. B147/B149/B190 6-50...

  • Page 509: Drum Gear Position Sensors

    [H][I]. In the ready status, the two interrupters stay in a parallel position. If they are not in a parallel position (as shown in the illustration), the machine adjusts the position of the black drum gear. 6-51 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 510: Initialization Process And Sc Codes

    NOTE: If the connector of the black drum position sensor has been connected to the yellow drum position sensor (and the connector of the yellow drum position sensor, to the black drum position sensor), no error occurs in step 1 and step 2. B147/B149/B190 6-52...

  • Page 511: Drum Charge And Quenching

    SP3-920-1 to -4 determine when this procedure (known as “refresh mode”) is done. It can also be executed at any time (using SP3-920-5) if the prints are smeared. Quenching is done by illuminating the whole area of the drum with the laser at the end of every job. 6-53 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 512: Drum Cleaning

    6.7.5 DRUM CLEANING B146D532.WMF The cleaning brush [A] spreads out the waste toner remaining on the drum. The cleaning blade [B] then scrapes it off. The toner collection auger [C] transports the toner towards the waste toner collection duct. B147/B149/B190 6-54...

  • Page 513: Waste Toner Collection

    The end of the waste toner collection duct is in the waste toner bottle [A]. There are three openings [B][C] and one collection coil [D] in this part. The waste toner drops into the bottle through the openings. The collection coil [D] is driven by drum drive motor-K. 6-55 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 514: Waste Toner Vibrator

    12 papers. In this case, the motor operates one time during the fifth printing of the second job, one time during the tenth printing of the second job, and one more time at the end of the second job (see ; This case does not satisfy condition B147/B149/B190 6-56...

  • Page 515: Waste Toner Bottle Full Detection

    “Replace Waste Toner,” and after the end of the job, the machine cannot be used until the bottle is replaced or emptied. NOTE: The number of sheets is calculated on the assumption that the paper size is A4 and that the coverage ratio of each color is 5%. 6-57 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 516: Development

    The TD sensor and center ID sensor control toner density. Each development unit has a TD sensor. The diameter of the development roller is 18 mm (circumference about 56.5 mm). B147/B149/B190 6-58...

  • Page 517: Drive

    This motor also drives the fusing unit and paper exit rollers. The gear trains are indicated in the diagram by dotted lines. The development drive motor-CMY [B] drives the development unit for magenta, cyan, and yellow through gears and clutches. This motor also drives the registration roller. 6-59 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 518: Developer Agitation

    DEVELOPMENT 6.8.3 DEVELOPER AGITATION B146D537.WMF Two mixing augers [A and B] circulate the developer forward and backward to agitate the developer. This happens during the process control self check, during toner supply, and during development. B147/B149/B190 6-60...

  • Page 519: Development Bias

    (i.e., if SP3-125-001 is set to 0). However, if process control is switched off, (i.e., if SP3-125-001 is set to 1), the dc bias is the value stored in SP2-201-001 to 009 (do not adjust in the field unless advised to do so). The ac bias cannot be adjusted. 6-61 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 520: Toner Supply Mechanism

    • When forced toner density adjustment (SP3-126-002) is done • At toner end recovery • Developer initialization The filter [F] on the inner package of the toner cartridge ensures that the internal pressure does not become too high. B147/B149/B190 6-62...

  • Page 521: Air Flow And Toner Flow

    The air flow generated by the air pump goes through the outer pipe [B], and comes out of the four openings at the top end. Toner Near End Detection Toner end sensors [D] detect toner near end conditions ( 6.2.6). 6-63 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 522: Toner Transport

    0.7 second and off for 1.3 seconds. The clutch turns on and off as many times as necessary to supply the appropriate amount of toner. The amount of toner depends on the results of toner supply control. Motor drive comes from the development drive motors. B147/B149/B190 6-64...

  • Page 523: Toner Cartridge Detection

    This is used to calculate the amount of toner remaining in the toner cartridge. The chip is also used to detect whether the cartridge is installed (if the cartridge is not installed, the machine does not detect a signal from the memory chip). B146D542.WMF 6-65 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 524: Paper Feed

    There are two paper trays (500 sheets each), and a by-pass feed table (100 sheets). The paper feed mechanism uses an FRR system. Tray 1 can only hold A4 or letter paper. Tray 2 can hold a range of sizes. B147/B149/B190 6-66...

  • Page 525: Drive – Tray 1, Tray 2, And By-Pass Tray

    [Q] turns on. When the paper feed clutch [B][C][D] turns on, the pick-up, feed [I][L][N], and separation [J][M][O] rollers start rotating to feed the paper. The paper feed clutch stays on until shortly after the registration sensor activates. 6-67 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 526: Paper Lift – Trays 1 & 2

    [F] on the lift arm shaft [G]. Then the tray lift arm [I] lifts the tray bottom plate [H] until the paper lift sensor for the tray detects that the top of the stack is at the paper feed position. B147/B149/B190 6-68...

  • Page 527: Paper Size Detection – Trays 1 & 2

    " LEF or B5 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-4 The machine disables paper feed from a tray if the paper size cannot be detected (if the paper size actuator is broken or no tray is installed). 6-69 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 528: Paper Height Detection – Trays 1 & 2

    If there is some paper in the paper tray, the paper stack raises the paper end feeler and the paper end sensor deactivates. When the paper tray runs out of paper, the paper end feeler drops into the cutout in the tray bottom plate, and this activates the paper end sensor. B147/B149/B190 6-70...

  • Page 529: Registration

    (the location of the gear train is indicated by dotted lines in the above diagram). The machine makes a paper buckle at the registration roller to correct paper skew. The paper buckle can be adjusted with SP1-003-1 to - 8. 6-71 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 530: Paper Feed Line Speed

    Line speed (mm/s) Paper feed from tray to registration roller Fusing, paper exit to standard tray, and mailbox A bit slower than “Process line speed” Duplex invert and feed Finisher B147/B149/B190 6-72...

  • Page 531: Grip Roller Release Mechanism

    The spring [A] is always pressing the grip roller against the transport roller [B]. When the above conditions are met, the solenoid [F] turns on, the lever [C] pushes the grip roller shaft [D], and the grip roller moves away from the paper. 6-73 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 532: Overview

    The junction gate inside the machine directs it upwards to the selected tray. • Duplex copies are not fed out to the external tray (on the left of the machine). B147/B149/B190 6-74...

  • Page 533: Duplex Operation

    Example: 8 pages. The number [A] in the illustration shows the order of pages. The number [B] in the illustration shows the order of sheets of paper (if shaded, this indicates the second side). ⇒ ⇒ ⇒ ⇒ ⇒ ⇒ ⇒ B146D553.WMF 6-75 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 534: Duplex Inverter Unit

    The duplex inverter motor 1 [A] drives the paper exit roller 1 [B], paper transport roller [C], paper exit roller 2 [D], and upper inverter roller [E]. The duplex inverter motor 2 [F] drives the exit roller 3 [G], paper exit roller 4 [H], and lower inverter roller [I]. B147/B149/B190 6-76...

  • Page 535: Feed To External Exit Tray (Non-Duplex Mode)

    The junction gate [B] directs the paper from the fusing unit out to the external tray if thick paper or OHP mode is selected, or if the external tray is selected as the output tray with the operation panel or the printer driver. 6-77 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 536: Feed To Duplex Feed Unit

    3 [C]. Then, the paper is switched back and junction mylar 3 directs the paper back into the machine for the second side. The next page shows how the paper is fed out to the finisher after both sides are printed. B147/B149/B190 6-78...

  • Page 537: Feed To Two-Tray Finisher And Booklet Finisher

    After the duplex inverter sensor [C] is activated, the machine waits until the trailing edge has passed junction mylar 2 [D], but before it passes junction mylar 3 [E]. Then, the paper is switched back and junction mylar 2 directs the paper out to the finisher. 6-79 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 538: Duplex Feed Unit

    DUPLEX UNIT 6.10.7 DUPLEX FEED UNIT Drive B146D562.WMF The duplex feed motor [A] drives all paper transport rollers. Feed-in and feed-out B146D563.WMF The duplex feed unit feeds the paper from the duplex inverter unit to the relay roller [A]. B147/B149/B190 6-80...

  • Page 539: Overview

    There are three ID sensors (front, center, and rear). Only the center ID sensor detects the image density of the patterns generated on the transfer belt for process control. The other function of the ID sensors is for automatic line position adjustment. All ID sensors are used for this. 6-81 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 540: Transfer Belt Drive

    6.11.2 TRANSFER BELT DRIVE Drive Motor B146D564.WMF The transfer unit drive motor [A] drives the transfer belt [B] and the cleaning unit via the timing belt and gears. The speed of transfer belt drive depends on the process line speed. B147/B149/B190 6-82...

  • Page 541: Rotation Encoder

    Filter H: The number of notches read by the sensor when the rotation speed of the transfer belt is at its possible highest. Filter L: The number of notches read by the sensor when the rotation speed of the transfer belt is at its possible lowest. 6-83 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 542: Transfer Current

    The back-up roller [E] makes a wider contact area between the drum [B] and the belt. The transfer exit roller [F] is charged to 2 kV. The roller prevents the toner from being scattered while the paper is leaving the transfer unit. The other rollers are grounded to neutralize the belt surface. B147/B149/B190 6-84...

  • Page 543: Transfer Belt Cleaning

    The cleaning brush [B] always contacts the transfer belt [C], and removes waste toner from the belt. The cleaning blade [D] in the cleaning unit scrapes the toner off the transfer belt. The toner collection auger [E] transports the toner towards the waste toner collection duct. 6-85 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 544: Transfer Belt Contact

    NOTE: If a power failure occurs when the transfer belt is in contact with the drum, the belt stays in this position. To release the belt, swing out the controller box, and turn the drive gear [B] manually. B147/B149/B190 6-86...

  • Page 545: Transfer Belt Sensor

    Original B/W Only Color Only B/W and Color Auto Color Select Black PCU Four PCUs Black PCU or four PCUs Full Color Four PCUs Four PCUs Four PCUs Black and White Black PCU Black PCU Black PCU 6-87 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 546: Printer Acs

    Black PCU Four PCUs Black PCU or four PCUs B&W Page Detect: Off Print Printer Driver B/W Only Color Only B/W and Color Black and White Black PCU Black PCU Black PCU Color Four PCUs Four PCUs Four PCUs B147/B149/B190 6-88...

  • Page 547: Overview

    • Temperature is normally controlled by turning the fusing lamps on and off. To change between on/off control and phase control: SP1-104-1. • The oil supply roller supplies oil to the fusing belt through the oiling roller. This mechanism spreads the oil on the fusing belt evenly. 6-89 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 548: Fusing Unit Drive

    This mechanism prevents the belt and rollers from wearing and saves the fusing oil. NOTE: The fusing clutch turns off when images and patterns are created on the transfer belt during process control and line position adjustment. B147/B149/B190 6-90...

  • Page 549: Fusing Temperature Control

    The heating and pressure roller temperatures for fusing are stored in SP1-105-4 to -28. When the machine is switched on, the fusing lamp temperatures increase to those specified by SP1-104-25. The print ready temperature is slightly less than the fusing temperature. The difference is specified by SP1-105-1 and -2. 6-91 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 550: Temperature Corrections

    • If either of the two thermofuses temperature becomes higher than 126°C, the thermofuse opens, removing power from the fusing lamp. NOTE: These thermofuses make a series circuit. In either case, the machine stops operation. B147/B149/B190 6-92...

  • Page 551: Oil Supply And Cleaning

    The oil [C] from the oil supply pad [B] is supplied to the oil supply roller [A]. The oil supply roller rotates and supplies a bit of oil to the oiling roller [D]. The oiling roller applies the oil to the fusing belt [E]. 6-93 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 552: Oil Supply Mechanism

    When the solenoid [A] turns on, the solenoid lever [B] pushes the oil supply lever [C] on the fusing unit. The movement is transmitted by the link [D] and the bracket [E] to the oil supply roller [F]. The roller is lifted and touches the oil supply pad [G]. B147/B149/B190 6-94...

  • Page 553: Waste Oil

    (or the main switch is turned off and on). Just opening and closing the cover does not clear the message. NOTE: With this error message, another message, “Waste Oil Bottle is Almost Full,” can be displayed ( Waste Oil Sensor). 6-95 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 554: Waste Oil Sensor

    2,500 sheets before the life of the oil supply unit runs out. This timing can be changed with SP7-905-14. . When the number has reached this ⇒ value, an error message is displayed and the copier stops its operation. B147/B149/B190 6-96...

  • Page 555: Energy Saver Modes

    • Auto off timer: User Tools – System Settings – Timer Setting – Auto Off Timer • Auto off disabling: User Tools – System Settings – Key Operator Tools – AOF (Always ON). This disables the auto off mode. 6-97 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 556: Panel Off Mode

    • A sheet of paper is placed in the by-pass feed table The return time from the panel off mode to stand-by mode is less than 30 seconds. Operation Energy Mode Fusing Temperature +24V System +5V Switch Saver LED Heating roller: Panel off Pressure roller: 130 B147/B149/B190 6-98...

  • Page 557: Auto Off Mode

    The machine returns to stand-by mode when the operation switch is pressed. The return time is less than 99 seconds. Operation Energy Mode Fusing Lamp +24V System +5V Note Switch Saver LED Stand-by (On when printing) +5VE is supplied 6-99 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 558: Paper Exit

    The junction gate solenoid [D] controls the junction gate as follows: • To the standard paper tray: The junction gate solenoid is off (default) • To the external paper tray: The junction gate solenoid is on. Development drive motor-K drives the exit rollers. B147/B149/B190 6-100...

  • Page 559: Paper Overflow Detection

    PAPER EXIT 6.13.2 PAPER OVERFLOW DETECTION B146D921.WMF When the paper overflow sensor [A] is activated, the machine detects that the paper stack height has exceeded a certain limit, and stops printing. 6-101 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 560: Printer Functions

    This is one of the GW-architecture ASICs. It uses a 124 MHz bus to interface with the CPU and memory. CLARINET controls the interface, memory, local bus, interruption processing, PCI bus, video data, HDD, network, operation panel, IEEE1284, and image processing. Flash ROM: The 16-MB flash ROM is for the system program. B147/B149/B190 6-102...
  • Page 561 Interface Option: You can install one of the four network components (USB 2.0, IEEE1394, Wireless LAN, Bluetooth). HDD: Two 40-GB HDDs are among standard components. Each hard disk is partitioned as shown below. You cannot change the partition sizes. 6-103 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 562: Hard Disk

    32-bit data to the memory. If a bad sector is found in an address of one hard disk drive, the sector in the corresponding address of the other hard disk drive is also treated as a bad sector. B147/B149/B190 6-104...

  • Page 563: Print Data Processing

    RGB 8 bits PCL Driver Decode & Scale 8 bits Color 8 bits Matching ICM Engine/ ICM profile 8 bits Dithering 8 bits & Correction 1 bit CMYK • BG/UCR, 1 bit • Gray Correction • Toner Limitation B146D933.WMF 6-105 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 564: Ps3 Driver

    CMY data is replaced with K data by the BG/UCR algorithm. Gamma Correction The printer gamma can be adjusted with controller SP mode (Gamma Adj.). For CMYK, there are15 points between 0 and 100%. The corrected gamma data is stored in NVRAM. B147/B149/B190 6-106...

  • Page 565: Toner Limitation

    8-bit data to 1-bit or 2-bit data. However, these dither patterns create the illusion of 256 gradations for high quality prints. The optimum dither pattern is selected depending on the selected resolution. RIP: Raster Image Processing ROP: Raster Operation 6-107 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 566: Controller Functions

    • The partition can hold a log containing up to 20 errors, excluding logs stored using locked print. • The maximum number of pages is 2,000, including jobs using sample print and collation. • Locked print uses the same hard disk partition as sample print and collation, which is 5.8 GB. B147/B149/B190 6-108...

  • Page 567: Job Spooling

    Job spooling can be turned on and off using the SP mode (SP5-828-069) for each protocol. The machine does not spool jobs when job spooling is switched off with the SP mode, even when the customer switches it on with the user mode. 6-109 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 568: Paper Source Selection

    NOTE: The by-pass feed table cannot be unlocked (Tray Locking is always enabled). Manual Tray Select If the selected tray does not have the paper size and type specified by the driver, the controller stops printing until the user loads the correct paper. B147/B149/B190 6-110...

  • Page 569: Auto Continue

    The machine prints from the selected tray even if the paper size and type do not match the setting specified from the driver. If “Auto Continue” is disabled, the machine waits until the user loads the correct paper in the tray. 6-111 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 570: Paper Output Tray

    The table lists the number of papers that the finishers can staple. Position Paper size A4, B5, LT A3, Ledger, Legal Two-tray finisher [A][B][C][D] 50 sheets 30 sheets [A][B][C][D] 50 sheets 25 sheets Booklet finisher — 10 sheets NOTE: For more paper sizes, see the specifications. B147/B149/B190 6-112...

  • Page 571: Punching

    The table shows which type you can install to your finisher. Finisher model Two holes Three holes Four holes North America Europe (excluding North Europe) North Europe : Available N/A: Not available 6-113 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 572: Ethernet Board

    The physical layer device, the lowest layer of the OSI reference model, refers to the physical components of the network: cables, connectors, and so on. OSI, the Operating Standard Interface, is a framework upon which networking standards are arranged. It is commonly diagramed as a layered cake. B147/B149/B190 6-114...

  • Page 573: Ethernet Board Operation

    The NIB is a standard IEEE802.3u type which implements 10/100Mbps auto negotiation. System initialization sets the network for 10Mbps/100Mbps. B146D580.WMF Indicates the operation mode: LED [A] (Orange) On: 100 Mbps mode Off: 10 Mbps mode Indicates the link status: LED [B] (Green) On: Link Safe Off: Link Fail 6-115 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 574: Ieee1394 Board (Firewire)

    IP over 1394 IEEE802.11b Ethernet (Wireless LAN) Port Port IEEE1394 Port IP over 1394 SCSI Printing Printing B146D581.WMF NOTE: 1) Windows Me and Windows XP support IP over 1394. 2) Windows XP and 2000 support IEEE1394 SCSI printing. B147/B149/B190 6-116...
  • Page 575 The camera can sent data via the Firewire connection in a steady flow to the computer without anything disrupting the process. This is one of the main reasons why 1394 has been widely adopted by the consumer electronics industry. 6-117 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 576: Specifications

    480Mbps (high speed). Up to 127 devices can be connected and 6 cascade connections are allowed. Power is supplied from the computer and the maximum cable length is 5 m. B147/B149/B190 6-118...

  • Page 577: Usb Connectors

    USB device. Type A connector Type B connector B146D583.WMF B146D582.WMF 6.17.4 PIN ASSIGNMENT The controller has the type B receptacle (CN10). B146D928.WMF Pin No. Signal Description Wiring Assignment Power Data – White Data + Green Power GND White 6-119 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 578: Remarks About Usb

    Data rates can also be adjusted using the UP mode “USB Setting” in the Host Interface in the System menu. This mode can be accessed only when the “Enter”, “Escape”, then “Menu” keys are pressed to enter the UP mode. B147/B149/B190 6-120...

  • Page 579: Ieee 802.11B (Wireless Lan)

    The following user tool setting determines which LAN is active: System Settings – Interface Settings – Network - LAN Type. LED Indicators Description LED 1 (Green) Link Status Linked No Link LED 2 (Orange) Power Distribution Power On Power Off 6-121 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 580: Transmission Modes

    This arrangement is used in more complex topologies. The wireless LAN client must use the same SSID (Service Set ID) as the access point in Access Point order to communicate. B146D585.WMF B147/B149/B190 6-122...

  • Page 581: Security Features

    NOTE: The WEP key can be set using the Web Status Monitor or Telnet. MAC Address When the infrastructure mode is used, access to the network can also be limited at the access points using the MAC address. This setting may not be available with some types of access points. 6-123 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 582: Wireless Lan Troubleshooting Notes

    To avoid interference with neighboring channels, it is recommended to change by 3 channels. For example, if there are problems using channel 11 (default), try using channel 8. 25MHz 25MHz Channel 2,412 2,437 2,462 B146D586.WMF B147/B149/B190 6-124...

  • Page 583: Troubleshooting Procedure

    2) Check the communication status. If the communication status is poor, bring the machine closer to the access point, or check for any obstructions between the machine and the access point. If the problem cannot be solved, try changing the channel setting. 6-125 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 584: Bluetooth

    2402 to 2480 MHz into 79 channels of 1 MHz width, and changes the channel 1600 times per second. If other devices in the LAN are using the same radio band, Bluetooth can avoid interference from the other devices. Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Time B146D587.WMF B147/B149/B190 6-126...

  • Page 585: Bluetooth Profiles

    PIN Code (Personal Identification Number). When the PIN code is used, the PC connects to the device that sent the PIN code. The PIN code is a 4 digit number. This machine uses the last four digits of the machine's serial number. It cannot be changed. 6-127 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 586: Scanner Functions

    JPEG file format (grayscale processing). The type of TIFF format used depends on the user’s scanner settings. When delivery mode is selected, the controller creates a file which contains the destination and page information, then the controller sends the file to a server. B147/B149/B190 6-128...

  • Page 587: Scanner Acs (Auto Color Selection)

    (a pixel is black or white, not gray). In this processing, the following information is compared: B146D938.WMF • The G signal level • The threshold (calculated from the average G signal level) 6-129 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 588: File Format Converter (Mlb)

    When the customer selects PDF, the machine creates a TIFF or JPEG file from the scanned image first then converts it to PDF. So, the total time to create a PDF is also shortened with the File Format Converter. B147/B149/B190 6-130...
  • Page 589 SPECIFICATIONS...

  • Page 591: General Specifications

    Left rear corner position: Copy speed: Normal B147: 24 cpm (color) or 32 cpm (black & white) B149: 28 cpm (color) or 38 cpm (black & white) B190: 20 cpm (color) or 28 cpm (black & white) OHP/Thick B147, B149, B190: 10 cpm (color/black & white) ADF 1 to 1 B147: 24 cpm (color) or 32 cpm (black &...
  • Page 592 Copier + 1-Tray PFU: 670x 698 x 1,020 mm (26.4" x 27.5" x 40.2") Copier + 2-Tray PFU or LCT: 670 x 698 x 1,118 mm (26.4" x 27.5" x 44.0") Weight: Less than 120 kg (265 lb.) [excluding toner] B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 593: Printer

    10 ppm Monochrome 1,800 x 600 dpi 32 ppm 10 ppm 1,200 x 1,200 dpi 28 ppm 10 ppm B147 600 x 600 dpi 24 ppm 10 ppm Color 1,800 x 600 dpi 24 ppm 10 ppm 1,200 x 1,200 dpi...

  • Page 594: Scanner

    1 bit or 8 bits/pixel each for RGB Scanning B/W: 28 ppm LEF Throughput Color: 24 ppm LEF (ARDF mode): Interface: Ethernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T for TCP/IP), IEEE 1394, Wireless LAN Compression B&W: TIFF (MH, MR, MMR) Method: Gray Scale, Full Color: JPEG B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 595: Supported Paper Sizes

    114 x 162 mm C5 Env. 162 x 229 mm DL Env. 110 x 220 mm Remarks: Supported: the sensor detects the paper size. Supported: the user specifies the paper size. Supported: depends on a technician adjustment Not supported B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 596: Paper Exit

    305 x 458 mm Com10 Env. 4.125" x 9.5" Monarch Env. 3.875" x 7.5" C6 Env. 114 x 162 mm C5 Env. 162 x 229 mm DL Env. 110 x 220 mm Remarks: Supported Not supported Stack only (Booklet not supported) B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 597: Platen/Ardf Original Size Detection

    7.25" x 10.5" (Executive) 10.5" x 7.25" Yes** (Executive) *: When the message “Cannot detect original size” appears, use SP4-303 to detect original sizes as A5 lengthwise/HLT. **: The machine can detect the paper size depending on the setting of SP6-016-1. B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 598: Software Accessories

    NT4) each client’s PC. LAN-Fax Driver This software enables you to fax documents directly form your PC. Address Book Editor and Cover Sheet Editor are to be installed as well. (These require the optional fax unit.) B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 599: Scanner

    SCANNER The scanner driver and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM. Scanner Drivers • Network Twain Driver for Win95/98/ME/NT4.0/2000/XP/2003 Scanner Utilities • Scan Router V2 Lite (Cherry-Lite) for Win95/98/ME/NT4.0/2000/XP • Desk Top Binder V2 Lite (Plumeria-Lite) for Win95/98/ME/NT4.0/2000/XP/2003 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 600: Machine Configuration

    B599 from [D], [E], and [F] Punch unit (for B599) B377 Requires [G] Multi-Bin output tray G306 One from [G], [H], and [I] One-tray paper feed unit B601 One from the three Two-tray paper feed unit B598 B600 B147/B149/B190 7-10...
  • Page 601 File Format Converter B609 Standard for the Europe and North America Printer/Scanner B612 models; Optional for other models Hard Disk Drive — Standard Distributed with the optional printer/scanner 256 MB DIMM G332 for the Asia model PostScript 3 G369 7-11 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 602: Optional Equipment

    48.9 to 200 % Power Source: DC 24V, 5V from the scanner unit Power Consumption: 60 W or less Dimensions (W × D × H): 570 mm x 518 mm x 150 mm (22.4” x 20.4” x 5.9”) Weight: 12 kg B147/B149/B190 7-12...

  • Page 603: One-Tray Paper Feed Unit

    5 steps (100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, Near End) Power Source: DC 24V, 5V (from the main unit) Power Consumption: 50 W Dimensions (W x D x H): 540 x 600 x 270 mm (21.3" x 23.7" x 10.7") Weight 25 kg (55.2 lb.) 7-13 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 604: Two-Tray Finisher & Punch Unit

    30 sheets: A4 (LEF) & A3, B5 (LEF) & B4, " x 11" (LEF) & 11" x 17" Staple position: 7 positions 1-staple: 4 positions (Top Left, Top Right, Top Left-Oblique, Top Right-Oblique) 2-staples: 3 positions (Left, Top, Right) B147/B149/B190 7-14...

  • Page 605: Booklet Finisher

    2 to 5 sheets/booklet: 20 6 to 10 sheets/booklet: 10 Staple capacity: 30 sheets Booklet capacity: 10 sheets Staple position: 3 positions (excluding booklet mode) 1-staple: 2 positions (Top right, Top left) 2-staples: 1 positions (Left) Staple replenishment: Cartridge (5000 staples) 7-15 B147/B149/B190...

  • Page 606: Multi-Bin Output Tray

    " x 11" Paper Weight 60 to 105 g/m (16 to 28 lb.) Stack Capacity Tray 1: 100 sheets (80 g/m , 20 lb.) Tray 2: 100 sheets (A4/smaller than 8 " x 11") 250 sheets (B4/8 " x 14") B147/B149/B190 7-16...
  • Page 607 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER B597...
  • Page 609 ARDF B597 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........1 1.1 COVERS ...................... 1 1.2 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT ................2 1.3 ORIGINAL PICK-UP ROLLER..............2 1.4 ORIGINAL FEED BELT ................3 1.5 SKEW CORRECTION/INTERVAL/ REGISTRATION/ORIGINAL WIDTH SENSORS ......................4 1.6 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS ..............5 1.7 SEPARATION ROLLER ................

  • Page 611: Replacement And Adjustment

    COVERS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1.1 COVERS B597R110.WMF B597R111.WMF [A]: Front cover ( x 2) [B]: Rear cover ( x 2) [C]: Top cover ( x 1,  x 2) [D]: Original tray ( x 1,  x 1) [E]: Platen sheet (Velcro pads) [F]: Original exit tray (...

  • Page 612: Original Feed Unit

    ORIGINAL FEED UNIT 1.2 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT Open the top cover. [A]: Original feed unit Press it toward you on its shaft to release and lift out. B597R101.WMF 1.3 ORIGINAL PICK-UP ROLLER Original feed unit (! 1.2) [A]: Pick-up roller ( x 1) B597R102.WMF B597...

  • Page 613: Original Feed Belt

    ORIGINAL FEED BELT 1.4 ORIGINAL FEED BELT B597R103.WMF B597R104.WMF Original feed unit and original pick-up roller (! 1.2, 1.3) [A]: Shaft ( x 1) NOTE: Before removing the shaft, note carefully the positioning of the spring [B]. This must be reset during re-installation. [C]: Feed belt cover (Timing belt, gear, shaft, springs x 2) NOTE: Do not lose the springs.

  • Page 614: Skew Correction/Interval/ Registration/Original Width Sensors

    SKEW CORRECTION/INTERVAL/ REGISTRATION/ORIGINAL WIDTH SENSORS 1.5 SKEW CORRECTION/INTERVAL/ REGISTRATION/ORIGINAL WIDTH SENSORS B597R105.WMF B597R106.WMF Open the top cover. [A]: Upper original guide ( x 3). [B]: Skew correction sensor ( x 1) [C]: Interval sensor ( x 1) [D]: Registration sensor ( x 1) [E]: Original width sensor bracket (...

  • Page 615: Original Length Sensors

    ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS 1.6 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS Raise the original table. [A]: Lower cover of original tray ( x 4) [B]: Original length sensor-1 ( x 1) [C]: Original length sensor-2 ( x 1) B597R107.WMF 1.7 SEPARATION ROLLER Original feed unit (! 1.2) [A]: Separation roller cover [B]: Separation roller (...

  • Page 616: Inverter /Original Set Sensors

    INVERTER /ORIGINAL SET SENSORS 1.8 INVERTER /ORIGINAL SET SENSORS Rear cover. (! 0) [A]: Lower the original stopper by rotating the pick-up motor Original feed unit (! 1.2) [B]: Feed guide plate ( x 4, stepped screw) NOTE: Raise the original tray before you re-install the paper feed guide.

  • Page 617: Transport Motor And Inverter Motor

    TRANSPORT MOTOR AND INVERTER MOTOR 1.10 TRANSPORT MOTOR AND INVERTER MOTOR B597R113.WMF B597R112.WMF Rear cover (! 0) [A]: Pick-up roller assembly ( x 1,  x 3,  x 3) [B]: Motor bracket ( x 3,  x 2, Timing belt x 2) [C]: Transport motor (...

  • Page 618: Feed Motor, Skew Correction Roller Clutch

    FEED MOTOR, SKEW CORRECTION ROLLER CLUTCH 1.11 FEED MOTOR, SKEW CORRECTION ROLLER CLUTCH B597R115.WMF Rear cover (! 0) [A]: Motor bracket ( x 5,  x 1) [B]: Feed motor ( x 2) [C]: Clutch stopper ( x 1) [D]: Skew correction roller clutch ( x 1) B597...

  • Page 619: Exit Sensor

    EXIT SENSOR 1.12 EXIT SENSOR Open the ARDF. [A]: Pull the platen sheet off halfway. [B]: Open the exit guide plate. [C]: Exit guide plate cover ( x 2) [D]: Exit sensor ( x 1,  x 1) 1.13 STAMP SOLENOID B597R116.WMF Rear cover (! 0) Open exit guide plate (! 1.12)

  • Page 620: Troubleshooting

    TIMING CHARTS 2. TROUBLESHOOTING 2.1 TIMING CHARTS 2.1.1 A4(S)/LT(S) SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE 2000 2000 (ms) 1000 1500 1000 1500 Original Set Sensor 1600 pps Pick-up Motor 1600 pps 1600 pps Original Stopper H.P Sn. Original Pick-up H.P Sn. 3979 pps 6800 pps Feed Motor 4385 pps...

  • Page 621: A4(S)/Lt(S) Double-Sided Original Mode

    TIMING CHARTS 2.1.2 A4(S)/LT(S) DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 Original Set Sensor 1600 pps Pick-up Motor 1600 pps 1600 pps Original Stopper H.P Sn. Original Pick-up H.P Sn. 6800 pps 3979 pps Feed Motor 4385 pps...

  • Page 622: Jam Detection

    JAM DETECTION 2.2 JAM DETECTION B597T905.WMF 1. Registration sensor 4. Inverter sensor 2. Interval sensor 5. Exit sensor 3. Skew correction sensor 6. Scanning position Jam Site Cause Original stopper HP Original stopper home position could not be detected within 1000 ms sensor (Jam 1) after the pick-up motor switched on and started rotating counter- clockwise.

  • Page 623: Service Tables

    DIP SWITCHES 3. SERVICE TABLES 3.1 DIP SWITCHES DPS101 Description Normal operating mode, with/without stamp. Not used Not used Not used Feed motor rotation (pull-out mode) 6800 pps (1-2 phase) Feed motor rotation (feed mode) 4385 pps (1-2 phase) Transport motor rotation 8268 pps (2W1-2 phase) Inverter motor rotation 7720 pps (1-2 phase) Free run: one-sided original 100% (color mode) Free run: one-sided original 200% (color mode)

  • Page 624: Detailed Descriptions

    MAIN COMPONENTS 4. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS 4.1 MAIN COMPONENTS B597D103.WMF 1 Pick-up roller 10 Exit sensor 2 Original tray 11 Idle roller 3 3 Original length sensor 1 12 Idle roller 2 4 Original length sensor 2 13 Transport roller 5 Reverse table 14 Registration sensor 6 Inverter roller 15 Idle roller 1...

  • Page 625: Drive Layout

    DRIVE LAYOUT 4.2 DRIVE LAYOUT B597D102.WMF 1 Feed motor 7 Inverter roller 2 Feed belt 8 Exit roller 3 Pick-up roller 9 Separation roller 4 Pick-up motor 10 Transport roller 5 Transport motor 11 Skew correction roller 6 Inverter motor B597...

  • Page 626: Original Size Detection

    ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION 4.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION 4.3.1 BASIC MECHANISM & " [B] B5 [C] LG B597D110.WMF The original size is detected by four original width sensors [A] and two original length sensors, [B] and [C]. The machine determines the original width when the leading edge of the original activates the registration sensor.
  • Page 627 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION Width Sensor Length Sensor Size (Width x Length) & " A3 L* (297 x 420 mm) B4 L (257 x 364 mm) A4 L (210 x 297 mm) A4 S* (297 x 210 mm) B5 L (182 x 257 mm) B5 S (257 x 182 mm) A5 L (148 x 210 mm) A5 S (210 x 148 mm)

  • Page 628: Mixed Original Size Mode

    ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION 4.3.2 MIXED ORIGINAL SIZE MODE This section explains what happens when the user selects mixed original size mode. Because this ADF is a sheet-through document feeder, the method for original document width detection is the same as when the originals are the same size, but the document length detection method is different.

  • Page 629: Original Feed-In Mechanism

    ORIGINAL FEED-IN MECHANISM 4.4 ORIGINAL FEED-IN MECHANISM 4.4.1 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION B597D109.WMF B597D505.WMF When the original is put on the original table, it contacts the original stopper [A] and pushes the actuator [B] out of the original set sensor [C]. When Start ...

  • Page 630: Original Skew Correction

    ORIGINAL FEED-IN MECHANISM 4.4.2 ORIGINAL SKEW CORRECTION B597D202.WMF This mechanism is the same as the skew correction used by the registration roller in the main machine. The feed motor and the skew correction clutch control the skew correction roller. Immediately after separation, the skew correction sensor [A] detects the leading edge of the original.

  • Page 631: Original Transport And Exit

    ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT 4.5 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT 4.5.1 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINALS B597D104.WMF The transport motor drives the transport roller [A] and the exit roller [B]. When the leading edge of the original activates the interval sensor [C], the transport motor rotates the transport roller.

  • Page 632: Double-Sided Originals

    ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT 4.5.2 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINALS Shortly after the transport motor has been turned on, the inverter solenoid is activated and junction gate [A] opens. The original is then scanned and transported towards the reverse table [B]. B597D105.WMF Shortly after the original exit sensor [C] detects the trailing edge of the original, the inverter solenoid turns off and the junction gate [D] closes.

  • Page 633: Stamp

    STAMP 4.6 STAMP B597D201.WMF NOTE: This function is only for fax mode. The stamp [A] is located between the transport roller [B] and the exit roller [C]. When the original reaches the stamp, the transport motor stops and the stamp solenoid turns on if the page is sent successfully (immediate transmission) or stored successfully (memory transmission).
  • Page 635 ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT B601...
  • Page 637 ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT B601 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........1 1.1 COVER REPLACEMENT ................1 1.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT ................2 1.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS ....2 1.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD ..........3 1.4 TRAY LIFT MOTOR ..................

  • Page 639: Replacement And Adjustment

    COVER REPLACEMENT 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1.1 COVER REPLACEMENT B601R102.WMF 1. Rear cover [A] ( x 2) B601...

  • Page 640: Roller Replacement

    ROLLER REPLACEMENT 1.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT 1.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS B601R101.WMF 1. Paper tray 2. Pick-up roller [A] (1 hook) 3. Paper Feed Roller [B] ( x 1) 4. Separation Roller [C] ( x 1) B601...

  • Page 641: Paper Feed Motor And Main Board

    PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD 1.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD B601R103.WMF 1. Rear cover (! 1.1) 2. Paper feed motor [A] ( x 1,  x 3) 3. Main board [B] ( x 2) B601...

  • Page 642: Tray Lift Motor

    TRAY LIFT MOTOR 1.4 TRAY LIFT MOTOR 1. Rear cover (! 1.1) 2. Tray lift motor [A] ( x 1,  x 2) B601R104.WMF 1.5 PAPER FEED CLUTCH 1. Rear cover (! 1.1) 2. Bracket [B] ( x 1) 3. Bushing 4.

  • Page 643: Paper Feed Unit Replacement

    PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT 1.6 PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT B601R106.WMF 1. Right cover [A] 2. Paper feed unit [B] ( x 2,  x 1) B601...

  • Page 644: Detailed Descriptions

    OVERVIEW 2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS 2.1 OVERVIEW 2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT B601D001.WMF 1. Pick-up Roller 2. Paper Feed Roller 3. Relay Roller 4. Separation Roller 5. Tray B601...

  • Page 645: Electrical Component Layout

    OVERVIEW 2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT B601D101.WMF 1. Paper Size Switch 1 8. Lift Sensor 2. Paper Size Switch 2 9. Paper Feed Clutch 3. Paper Size Switch 3 10. Vertical Guide Switch 4. Paper Size Switch 4 11. Tray Lift Motor 5.

  • Page 646: Drive Layout

    OVERVIEW 2.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT B601D102.WMF 1. Paper Feed Motor 2. Paper Feed Clutch 3. Paper Feed Roller 4. Separation Roller 5. Pick-up Roller B601...

  • Page 647: Two-Tray Paper Feed Unit

    TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT B598...
  • Page 649 TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT B598 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........1 1.1 COVER REPLACEMENT ................1 1.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT ................2 1.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS ....2 1.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD ..........3 1.4 TRAY LIFT MOTORS...................

  • Page 651: Replacement And Adjustment

    COVER REPLACEMENT 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1.1 COVER REPLACEMENT B598R102.WMF 1. Rear cover [A] ( x 2) B598...

  • Page 652: Roller Replacement

    ROLLER REPLACEMENT 1.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT 1.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS B598R101.WMF 1. Paper tray 2. Pick-up roller [A] (1 hook) 3. Paper Feed Roller [B] ( x 1) 4. Separation Roller [C] ( x 1) B598...

  • Page 653: Paper Feed Motor And Main Board

    PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD 1.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD B598R103.WMF 1. Rear cover (! 1.1) 2. Paper feed motor [A] ( x 1,  x 3) 3. Main board [B] ( x 2) B598...

  • Page 654: Tray Lift Motors

    TRAY LIFT MOTORS 1.4 TRAY LIFT MOTORS 1. Rear cover (! 1.1) 2. Tray lift motor [A] ( x 1,  x 2) B598R104.WMF 1.5 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES 1. Rear cover (! 1.1) 2. Paper feed clutches [A] ( x 1, 1 bracket, 1 bushing) B598R105.WMF B598...

  • Page 655: Paper Feed Unit Replacement

    PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT 1.6 PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT B598R107.WMF B598R108.WMF 1. Vertical transport cover [A] (1 hook) 2. Paper feed unit [B] ( x 2,  x 1) B598...

  • Page 656: Detailed Descriptions

    OVERVIEW 2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS 2.1 OVERVIEW 2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT B598D001.WMF 1. Upper Pick-up Roller 6. Lower Paper Feed Roller 2. Upper Paper Feed Roller 7. Lower Separation Roller 3. Upper Relay Roller 8. Lower Pick-up Roller 4. Upper Separation Roller 9.

  • Page 657: Electrical Component Layout

    OVERVIEW 2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT B598D101.WMF 1. Paper Size Switch 1 14. Vertical Guide Switch 2. Paper Size Switch 2 15. Lower Lift Sensor 3. Paper Size Switch 3 16. Lower Tray Lift Motor 4. Paper Size Switch 4 17. Lower Paper End Sensor 5.

  • Page 658: Drive Layout

    OVERVIEW 2.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT B598D102.WMF 1. Tray Motor 7. Lower Pick-up Roller 2. Upper Paper Feed Clutch 8. Upper Separation Roller 3. Lower Paper Feed Clutch 9. Upper Relay Roller 4. Lower Relay Roller 10. Upper Paper Feed Roller 5. Lower Separation Roller 11.

  • Page 659: Large Capacity Tray

    LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B600...
  • Page 661 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B600 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........... 1 1.1 DETACHING THE TRAY FROM THE MAINFRAME........1 1.2 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR ................ 1 1.3 CHANGING THE TRAY PAPER SIZE............2 1.4 LEFT TRAY PAPER END SENSOR ............3 1.5 TRAY LIFT MOTOR ..................

  • Page 663: Replacement And Adjustment

    DETACHING THE TRAY FROM THE MAINFRAME 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1.1 DETACHING THE TRAY FROM THE MAINFRAME 1. To draw the tray out, press the stopper [A] on the guide rail. 2. To install the tray, set the tray on the guide rails, keep the tray level, and push the tray in.

  • Page 664: Changing The Tray Paper Size

    CHANGING THE TRAY PAPER SIZE 1.3 CHANGING THE TRAY PAPER SIZE B600R103.WMF 1. Screws [A] [B] 2. Change the position of the side fences. 3. Change the position of the rear fence HP sensor (! 1.2). 4. Before securing the right tray side fence, load the paper in the right tray, and adjust the fence.

  • Page 665: Left Tray Paper End Sensor

    LEFT TRAY PAPER END SENSOR 1.4 LEFT TRAY PAPER END SENSOR B600R104.WMF 1. Pull out the large capacity tray. 2. Left tray side fence [A] ( x 2) 3. Rear fence bracket [B] ( x1) 4. Left tray paper end sensor [C] ( x 1) B600...

  • Page 666: Tray Lift Motor

    TRAY LIFT MOTOR 1.5 TRAY LIFT MOTOR B600R105.WMF B600R106.WMF 1. Rear cover [A] ( x 2) 2. Tray lift motor [B] ( x 3,  x 1) B600...

  • Page 667: Tray Motor And Stack Transport Clutch

    TRAY MOTOR AND STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH 1.6 TRAY MOTOR AND STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH B600R107.WMF 1. Rear cover (! 1.5) 2. Tray motor [A] ( x 6,  x 1) 3. Bracket [B] ( x 1) 4. Stack transport clutch [C] ( x 2, 2 bushings, 1 gear) B600...

  • Page 668: Paper Feed Clutch

    PAPER FEED CLUTCH 1.7 PAPER FEED CLUTCH B600R108.WMF 1. Rear cover (! 1.5) 2. Bracket [A] ( x 1) 3. Bushing 4. Paper feed clutch [B] B600...

  • Page 669: Paper Feed Unit

    PAPER FEED UNIT 1.8 PAPER FEED UNIT B600R109.WMF 1. Stack transport clutch (! 1.6) 2. Paper feed clutch (! 1.7) 3. Paper feed unit cable [A] 4. Open the vertical transport guide plate [B]. 5. Paper feed unit [C] ( x 2) B600...

  • Page 670: Upper Limit, Right Tray Paper End, And Relay Sensors

    UPPER LIMIT, RIGHT TRAY PAPER END, AND RELAY SENSORS 1.9 UPPER LIMIT, RIGHT TRAY PAPER END, AND RELAY SENSORS B600R111.WMF Paper feed unit (! 1.8) 2. Sensors • Upper limit [A] • Relay [B] ( x 1, 1 bracket) • Right tray paper end [C] NOTE: To remove the upper limit [A] or paper end sensor[C], press the lever [D] and hold it down.

  • Page 671: Pick-Up/Paper Feed/Separation Roller

    PICK-UP/PAPER FEED/SEPARATION ROLLER 1.10 PICK-UP/PAPER FEED/SEPARATION ROLLER B600R110.WMF 1. Paper tray unit 2. Pick-up roller [A] (1 hook) 3. Separation roller [B] ( x 1) 4. Feed roller [C] ( x 1) NOTE: If the rollers are incorrectly installed, the one-way clutch does not work. B600...

  • Page 672: Detailed Section Descriptions

    OVERVIEW 2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS 2.1 OVERVIEW 2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT B600D001.WMF 1. Paper Height Sensors 5 8. Relay Roller 2. Paper Height Sensors 4 9. Separation Roller 3. Paper Height Sensors 1 10. Paper Height Sensors 2 4. Pick-up Roller 11.

  • Page 673: Electrical Component Layout

    OVERVIEW 2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT B600D101.WMF 1. End Fence Home Position Sensor 11. Upper Limit Sensor 2. Left Tray Paper End Sensor 12. Paper Feed Clutch 3. Paper Height Sensor 4 13. Paper Height Sensor 2 4. Paper Height Sensor 5 14.

  • Page 674: Paper Feed

    PAPER FEED 2.2 PAPER FEED B600D102.WMF • This product uses an FRR type paper feed mechanism. • The paper feed unit consists of the pick-up roller [A], paper feed roller [B], separation roller [C], and relay roller. • There is a torque limiter (ferrite powder type) in the back of the separation roller. B600...

  • Page 675: Separation Roller And Pick-Up Roller Release

    SEPARATION ROLLER AND PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE 2.3 SEPARATION ROLLER AND PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE B600D107.WMF B600D108.WMF To prevent the paper from being torn when pulling out the paper feed tray, the separation and pickup rollers are set so that they release automatically. When the paper tray [A] is not inside the machine, the separation roller [B] is away from the paper feed roller [C] and the pick-up roller [D] stays in the upper position.

  • Page 676: Tray Lift

    TRAY LIFT 2.4 TRAY LIFT B600D103.WMF When the paper feed tray is put in the machine, the tray sensor on the back face turns on and the tray lift motor [A] starts. The base plate lift shaft [B] is coupled to the lift motor at shaft [C], so the base plate of the tray is lifted.

  • Page 677: Near End/End Detection

    NEAR END/END DETECTION 2.5 NEAR END/END DETECTION This tray holds two stacks of paper, so the machine needs to monitor the status of both these stacks. There are seven sensors to do this. In the right tray (paper feed side), three height sensors ([E] in the diagram on the previous page) measure the height of the stack, and an end sensor detects when all the paper is used up.

  • Page 678: Paper Stack Transport Mechanism

    PAPER STACK TRANSPORT MECHANISM 2.6 PAPER STACK TRANSPORT MECHANISM B600D104.WMF When the paper in the right tray is used up, the tray motor [A] and stack transport clutch [B] turn on. Then the rear fence [C] moves the stack of paper from the left tray to the right tray.

  • Page 679: Right Tray Paper End Detection

    RIGHT TRAY PAPER END DETECTION 2.7 RIGHT TRAY PAPER END DETECTION B600D106.WMF B600D111.WMF The paper end sensor [A] detects when copy paper in the right tray runs out. When there is paper in the tray, the paper pushes up the paper end feeler [B] and causes the actuator to enter the sensor.

  • Page 681: Two-Tray Finisher

    TWO-TRAY FINISHER B599...
  • Page 683 TWO-TRAY FINISHER B599 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........... 1 1.1 COVERS ...................... 1 1.1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS................1 1.1.2 INNER COVER..................1 1.2 POSITIONING ROLLER................2 1.3 TRAY 1 EXIT SENSOR ................2 1.4 ENTRANCE SENSOR/STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE SENSOR ....3 1.5 STAPLER TRAY...................
  • Page 684 Normal and sort/stack modes ..............19 Staple Mode................... 20 Tray 1 release mechanism..............21 4.5.2 TRAY 2 ....................22 4.5.3 PRE-STACK MECHANISM ............... 23 4.6 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM....... 24 Vertical Paper Alignment ...............24 Horizontal Paper Alignment ..............24 4.7 STAPLER MECHANISM ................25 4.7.1 STAPLER MOVEMENT..............

  • Page 685: Replacement And Adjustment

    COVERS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1.1 COVERS 1.1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS 1. Top cover [A] ( x 4) NOTE: If the shift tray below is blocking the screw hole, remove the shift tray. 2. Bracket [B] ( x 1) 3. Front door [C] 4.

  • Page 686: Positioning Roller

    POSITIONING ROLLER 1.2 POSITIONING ROLLER 1. Open the front door. 2. Positioning roller [A] ( x 1) 3. Belt [B] B599R103.WMF 1.3 TRAY 1 EXIT SENSOR 1. Top cover (! 1.1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS) 2. Open transport door [A] 3. Bracket [B] ( x 1, ( x 1) 4.

  • Page 687: Entrance Sensor/Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor

    ENTRANCE SENSOR/STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE SENSOR 1.4 ENTRANCE SENSOR/STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE SENSOR 1. Entrance sensor bracket [A] ( x 1,  x 1) 2. Entrance sensor [B] ( x 1) 3. Stapler tray entrance sensor bracket [C] ( x 1,  x 1) 4.

  • Page 688: Upper Stack Height Sensors/Tray 1 Upper Limit Switch

    UPPER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS/TRAY 1 UPPER LIMIT SWITCH 1.6 UPPER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS/TRAY 1 UPPER LIMIT SWITCH B599R201.WMF B599R109.WMF B599R110.WMF 1. External covers (! 1.1.1) 2. Place one hand under tray 2 (the lower tray), press in on the gear [A] to release the tray, and then support it with your hand as it descends.

  • Page 689: Exit Guide Plate Motor

    EXIT GUIDE PLATE MOTOR 1.7 EXIT GUIDE PLATE MOTOR 1. Tray 1 back fence (! 1.6) 2. Exit guide plate motor [A] ( x2,  NOTE: Disengage the shaft of the exit guide plate motor from the ring. B599R111.WMF 1.8 LIFT MOTORS 1.
  • Page 690 LIFT MOTORS 4. Motor bracket [C] ( x 3,  x 2) B599R204.WMF 5. Tray 1 lift motor [D] ( x 2, drive belt) 6. Tray 2 lift motor [E] ( x 2, drive belt) B599R205.WMF B599...

  • Page 691: Lower Exit Sensor

    LOWER EXIT SENSOR 1.9 LOWER EXIT SENSOR 1. Front door, external and internal covers. (! 1.1) 2. Exit guide plate motor (! 1.7) 3. Guide plate [A] ( x 1) NOTE: Pull the shaft toward you through the round hole. B599R112.WMF 4.

  • Page 692: Lower Stack Height Sensors

    LOWER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS 1.10 LOWER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS 1. Stapler tray (! 1.5) 2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1,  x 2) 3. Bracket [B] ( x 1) 4. Feeler [C] 5. Lower stack height sensors [D] B599R116.WMF 1.11 TRAY 2 SHUNT POSITION SENSOR 1.

  • Page 693: Stapler Rotation Hp Sensor

    STAPLER ROTATION HP SENSOR 1.13 STAPLER ROTATION HP SENSOR 1. Stapler unit (! 1.12) 2. Carefully rotate the stapler holder [A]. 3. Stapler cover [B] ( x 1) 4. Sensor bracket [C] ( x 1,  x 1) 5. Stapler rotation HP sensor [D] 1.14 TRAY 1 INTERIOR B599R118.WMF 1.14.1 TRAY 1 COVERS...

  • Page 694: Tray Shift Sensors And Tray Release Sensor

    TRAY 1 INTERIOR 1.14.2 TRAY SHIFT SENSORS AND TRAY RELEASE SENSOR 1. Tray 1 covers (! 1.14.1) 2. Gear disk [A] ( x 1) 3. Tray shift sensors [B] ( x 1 each). 4. Tray release sensor [C] ( x 1) B599R210.WMF 1.14.3 TRAY 1 SHIFT MOTOR 1.

  • Page 695: Finisher Main Board

    FINISHER MAIN BOARD 1.15 FINISHER MAIN BOARD 1. Rear cover (! 1.1.1) 2. Main PCB [A] ( x 6, All ) B599R206.WMF 1.16 PUNCH HOLE POSITION ADJUSTMENT To adjust the position of the punch holes in the paper feed direction, use the appropriate SP mode.

  • Page 696: Troubleshooting

    JAM DETECTION 2. TROUBLESHOOTING 2.1 JAM DETECTION Mode Content Shift 1 Shift 2 Staple Entrance sensor: After the exit sensor in the main machine no detection went off, the entrance sensor did not switch on for at least 2 s. Entrance sensor: After the entrance sensor switched on, it did no detection...

  • Page 697: Service Tables

    DIP SWITCH SETTINGS 3. SERVICE TABLES 3.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS The DIP switches should not be set to any combination other than those described in the table below. DPS101 Mode Description Default. Free run. No paper. Transportation See the note below. NOTE: The following procedure repositions the shift trays to the shipping position.

  • Page 698: Detailed Descriptions

    GENERAL LAYOUT 4. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS 4.1 GENERAL LAYOUT B599D118.WMF 1. Upper junction gate 5. Stapler 2. Punch unit (option) 6. Stapler tray 3. Stapler junction gate 7. Tray 2 4. Pre-stack tray 8. Tray 1 Tray junction gate: Directs paper either to the upper or lower exit. In staple mode, the stack always goes out to the lower exit.

  • Page 699: Drive Layout

    DRIVE LAYOUT 4.2 DRIVE LAYOUT B599D104.WMF B599D103.WMF 1. Tray 1 lift motor 10. Lower transport motor 2. Entrance roller 11. Pre-stack motor 3. Tray 2 lift motor 12. Upper transport motor 4. Upper exit roller 13. Punch motor 5. Tray 1 shift motor 14.

  • Page 700: Junction Gates

    JUNCTION GATES 4.3 JUNCTION GATES The two junction gates can direct paper to three destinations. In sort/stack mode for tray 1, the tray junction solenoid [A] is on, and the prints go to the upper exit (tray 1 is at the upper exit for sort/stack mode). B599D205.WMF In sort/stack mode for tray 2, both the tray junction gate solenoid [A] and stapler junction gate solenoid [B] are...

  • Page 701: Tray Shifting

    TRAY SHIFTING 4.4 TRAY SHIFTING 4.4.1 TRAY SHIFT MECHANISMS B599D106.WMF Tray 1 (Upper Tray) In sort/stack mode, tray 1 [A] moves from side to side to separate the printed sets. The tray 1 shift motor [B], inside the shift tray, controls the horizontal position of tray 1 through the timing belt [C] and gear disk [D].

  • Page 702: Tray 2 (Lower Tray)

    TRAY SHIFTING Tray 2 (Lower Tray) B599D105.WMF In sort/stack mode, tray 2 [A] moves from side to side to separate the sets of prints. The shift mechanism for tray 2 is similar to that used for tray 1. However, when the tray 2 shift motor [B] turns on, the arm [D] moves the entire end fence [C] from side to side (not just the tray).

  • Page 703: Tray Up/Down Mechanisms

    TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS 4.5 TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS 4.5.1 TRAY 1 B599D204.WMF Introduction The tray 1 lift motor [A] controls the vertical position of tray 1 [B] through gears and timing belts [C]. Normal and sort/stack modes When the main switch is turned on, the tray is initialized at the upper position. To do this, the tray is moved up until upper stack height sensor 1 [D] is de-actuated.

  • Page 704: Staple Mode

    TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS Staple Mode B599D204.WMF In staple mode, stapled stacks can be delivered to either tray, but they can only go to the lower exit. So, if tray 1 is selected, tray 1 [A] moves down to the lower paper exit.

  • Page 705: Tray 1 Release Mechanism

    TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS Tray 1 release mechanism When tray 1 is selected for staple mode, tray 1 must be moved down to the lower paper exit. However, to move past the sensors at the lower exit, the tray must be moved away from the finisher.

  • Page 706: Tray 2

    TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS 4.5.2 TRAY 2 Overflow condition Multi Tray Staple Mode Normal Mode B599D500.WMF B599D109.WMF The tray 2 lift motor [A] controls the vertical position of tray 2 [B] through gears and timing belts [C]. The paper height detection is the same as for tray 1. When the tray lowers during printing, the tray is judged to be overflowing when the tray 2 overflow sensor 1 [D] is off and the tray 2 overflow sensor-2 [F] is on (see ‘Normal Mode’...

  • Page 707: Pre-Stack Mechanism

    TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS 4.5.3 PRE-STACK MECHANISM B599D200.WMF NOTE: This feature is available only when using A4 L, LT L, and B5 L. During stapling, the main machine must wait. This mechanism reduces the wait by holding the first two sheets of a job while the previous job is still being stapled. It only works during the second and subsequent sets of a multi-set print job.

  • Page 708: Jogger Unit Paper Positioning Mechanism

    JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM 4.6 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM B599D110.WMF In staple mode, each sheet of print paper is vertically and horizontally aligned when it arrives in the stapler tray. Vertical Paper Alignment After the trailing edge of the paper passes the stapler tray entrance sensor [A], the positioning roller solenoid [B] is energized for a specified time to push the positioning roller [C] into contact with the paper.

  • Page 709: Stapler Mechanism

    STAPLER MECHANISM 4.7 STAPLER MECHANISM 4.7.1 STAPLER MOVEMENT B599D112.WMF B599D113.WMF The stapler can be moved from side to side or rotated according to the requirements of the selected stapling mode. Stapler Rotation After the start key is pressed, the stapler rotation motor [A] rotates the staple unit [B] until the stapler rotation HP sensor [C] is activated.

  • Page 710: Stapler

    STAPLER MECHANISM 4.7.2 STAPLER B599D208.WMF The staple hammer is driven by the stapler hammer motor [A] inside the stapler. As soon as the paper stack is aligned, the staple hammer motor starts. When stapling is finished, the staple hammer HP sensor [B] is turned on, and the staple hammer motor then stops.

  • Page 711: Feed Out And Transport

    STAPLER MECHANISM 4.7.3 FEED OUT AND TRANSPORT B599D115.WMF B599D114.WMF When stapling starts, the exit guide plate motor [A] switches on and opens the exit guide plate [B], so that the stapled stack can exit to the tray. The exit guide plate sensor [C] detects when to switch off the exit guide plate motor.

  • Page 712: Punch Unit (Optional)

    PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL) 4.8 PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL) The punch unit punches holes in printed sheets, one by one. The punch unit is provided with a new punch mechanism to improve the accuracy of punching. B599D102.WMF B599D101.WMF 4.8.1 PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM The punch drive mechanism is driven by the punch motor [A].

  • Page 713: Punch Waste Collection

    PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL) 4.8.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION B599D153.WMF Waste punchouts are collected in the punch waste hopper [A] below the punch unit inside the finisher. When the top of the punchout waste in the hopper reaches and actuates the hopper sensor [B], a message will be displayed on the operation panel after the current job is completed.
  • Page 715 BOOKLET FINISHER B602...
  • Page 717 BOOKLET FINISHER B602 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT..........1 1.1 REGULAR TRAY..................1 1.2 COVERS ...................... 1 1.2.1 FRONT COVER................... 1 1.2.2 REAR COVER ..................3 1.2.3 LEFT/RIGHT TOP AND TRAY UPPER COVER ......... 3 1.2.4 UPPER RIGHT COVER ..............5 1.3 SIDE GUIDE....................
  • Page 718 Punch Type.................... 39 EEPROM ....................39 2. SERVICE TABLES ................ 40 2.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS ................40 Punch Controller Board................40 3. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS............41 3.1 GENERAL LAYOUT ................... 41 3.2 DRIVE ......................42 3.3 CONTROLLER ................... 43 3.4 STACK TRAY ..................... 44 3.4.1 SIMPLE OUTPUT................
  • Page 719 Paper Full ....................58 Fail Safe Feature ................... 58 3.7 SADDLE STITCH ..................59 3.7.1 OVERVIEW ..................59 3.7.2 STACK TRAY ..................60 3.7.3 STAPLER ..................60 3.7.4 PAPER TRANSPORT ............... 61 3.7.5 PAPER OUTPUT................62 Folding Plate Mechanism............... 62 Folding Plate Home Position..............

  • Page 721: Replacement And Adjustment

    REGULAR TRAY 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1.1 REGULAR TRAY Regular tray [A] ( x 4) B602R901.WMF 1.2 COVERS 1.2.1 FRONT COVER B602R988.WMF B602R987.WMF 1. Joint guard [A] ( x 2) 2. Front lower cover [B] ( x 2) B602...
  • Page 722 COVERS 3. Open the front door [A]. 4. Release the stopper and remove the knob [B]. 5.  [C] x 2 B602R902.WMF 6. Front cover [D] B602R903.WMF B602...

  • Page 723: Rear Cover

    COVERS 1.2.2 REAR COVER B602R905.WMF B602R904.WMF Rear cover [A] ( [B] x 2,  [C] x 1) NOTE: One of the screws is under the mylar [D]. 1.2.3 LEFT/RIGHT TOP AND TRAY UPPER COVER 1. Front cover (! 1.2.1) 2. Rear cover (! 1.2.2) 3.
  • Page 724 COVERS B602R908.WMF B602R906.WMF 4. Open the left top cover [A]. 5. Fastener [B] 6. Strap [C] 7. Tray upper cover [D] ( x 1,  x 1) 8. Right top cover (with the right top cover holder) B602...

  • Page 725: Upper Right Cover

    COVERS 1.2.4 UPPER RIGHT COVER 1. Front cover (! 1.2.1) 2. Rear cover (! 1.2.2) 3. Left top cover (! 1.2.3) 4.  [A] x 1 B602R910.WMF 5. Upper right cover [B] ( [C] x 1, 4 hooks) B602R911.WMF B602...

  • Page 726: Side Guide

    SIDE GUIDE 1.3 SIDE GUIDE Removal 1. Regular tray (! 1.1) 2. Front cover (! 1.2.1) 3. Rear cover (! 1.2.2) 4. Regular tray holders [A][B] ( x 1 for each) 5.  [C] x 4 6. Side-guide fastener [D] B602R912.WMF 7.

  • Page 727: Stapler Unit

    STAPLER UNIT 1.4 STAPLER UNIT Removal CAUTION: Do not remove the stapler [A] from the stapler unit. The stapler and the staple holder [B] must be in their original positions. B602R915.WMF 1. Open the front door [C]. 2. Release the lever [D] and pull out the stapler unit.
  • Page 728 STAPLER UNIT 6. Gear cover [A] (2 hooks) 7. Side cover [B] ( x 1) B602R918.WMF 8. Gear [C] ( x 1), gear [D] ( x 1), and timing belt [E] 9. Spacer (behind gear [C]) 10. Gear (behind the spacer) 11.
  • Page 729 STAPLER UNIT 13. Timing belt [A] 14. Gear [B] ( x 1) B602R920.WMF B602...

  • Page 730: Adjusting The Stapler Gear Phase

    STAPLER UNIT Adjusting the Stapler Gear Phase If you remove the gears [A][C] and timing belt [B], you must adjust the phase of the gears when you reassemble the machine. These gears and the belt decide when the staple holder sends a staple and when the stapler bends the staple.
  • Page 731 STAPLER UNIT 2. To fix the gear in position, place a thin tool [A] such as an Allen key or screwdriver through the holes. B602R922.WMF 3. By rotating gear [B], align the hole in cam [C] with the hole in the frame [D]. B602R923.WMF 4.
  • Page 732 STAPLER UNIT 5. Install the timing belt [A]. B602R925.WMF 6. Align the blue mark [B] on the gear with the hole [C] in the frame, and install the gear. NOTE: The stapler is in the home position when the blue mark and the hole are aligned.

  • Page 733: Folding Unit

    FOLDING UNIT 1.5 FOLDING UNIT Removal 1. Front cover (! 1.2.1) 2. Rear cover (! 1.2.2) 3. Open the right cover [A]. 4. Magnet bracket [B] ( x 2) 5. Inner cover [C] ( x 2) 6. Tension plate [D] B602R991.WMF 7.
  • Page 734 FOLDING UNIT 8. Timing belt [A] ( x 1, 1 spacer) 9. Two connectors [B][C] B602R930.WMF 10. Stapler unit [D] (! 1.4). 11. Folding unit [E] ( [F] x 3) B602R931.WMF B602...

  • Page 735: Adjusting The Folding Unit Gear Phase

    FOLDING UNIT Adjusting the Folding Unit Gear Phase If you remove gears from the folding unit, you must adjust the phase of the gears when you reassemble the folding unit. B602R932.WMF B602R994.WMF 1. Arrange the folding rollers [A] and cam [B] as shown in the diagram. 2.

  • Page 736: Stack Tray And Jogger Fence

    STACK TRAY AND JOGGER FENCE 1.6 STACK TRAY AND JOGGER FENCE 1.6.1 STACK TRAY UNIT B602R934.WMF 1. Left top cover, tray upper cover (! 1.2.3) 2. Side guide (! 1.3) 3.  [A] x 2 4.  [B] x 5, 2 standoffs 5.
  • Page 737 STACK TRAY AND JOGGER FENCE 6.  [A] x 3 7. Open the cable fasteners [B]. 8. Release the cables [C]. B602R936.WMF 9. Timing belt [D] ( x 1, 1 spacer) 10. 2 standoffs [E] B602R937.WMF B602...

  • Page 738: Jogger Fence Unit

    STACK TRAY AND JOGGER FENCE 11.  [A] x 2 12. Slide the stack tray [B] to the rear and lift it. B602R938.WMF 1.6.2 JOGGER FENCE UNIT CAUTION: Do not damage the jogger fences. 1. Stack tray (!1.6.1) 2. Place the stack tray unit on a level surface.
  • Page 739 STACK TRAY AND JOGGER FENCE 3. Timing belt [A] 4.  [B] x 2 B602R940.WMF 5. Jogger fence unit [C] B602R941.WMF B602...

  • Page 740: Stapler Motor Unit

    STAPLER MOTOR UNIT 1.7 STAPLER MOTOR UNIT 1. Rear cover (! 1.2.2) 2. Stapler unit (! 1.4). 3. Connector holder [A] ( x 1) 4. Release all the cables (on the stapler motor unit) [B] from the clamps. 5. Release the cables [D] ( x 2 [from the stapler motor unit or from the controller]) B602R942.WMF...
  • Page 741 STAPLER MOTOR UNIT 8.  [A] x 3 B602R946.WMF 9. Stapler motor unit [B] ( [C] x 1) B602R947.WMF B602...

  • Page 742: Transport

    TRANSPORT 1.8 TRANSPORT 1.8.1 TRANSPORT MOTOR 1. Rear cover (! 1.2.2) 2. Cable guide [A] ( x 1) 3. Transport motor (with the timing belt behind) [B] ( x 1,  x 3) B602R948.WMF 1.8.2 TRANSPORT ROLLER 1. Front cover (! 1.2.1) 2.
  • Page 743 TRANSPORT 7.  [A] x 2 B602R950.WMF 8. Gear [B] 9. Gear (with the pin behind) [C] 10. Bushing [D] ( x 1) 11.  [E] x 1 12. Paper guide [F] B602R951.WMF 13. Transport roller [G] B602R952.WMF B602...

  • Page 744: Stack Tray

    STACK TRAY 1.9 STACK TRAY 1.9.1 STACK TRAY UPPER ROLLER 1. Jogger fence unit (! 1.6.2) 2. Rotate the gear [A] counterclockwise and lift the stack tray upper roller unit [B]. B602R953.WMF 3. Release the stack tray upper roller [C] from the shaft [D].

  • Page 745: Stack Tray Paddle

    STACK TRAY 4. Lift up the stack tray upper roller [A], and push it down. 5. In the same manner, remove the other roller [B]. B602R955.WMF 1.9.2 STACK TRAY PADDLE 1. Jogger fence unit (! 1.6.2) 2. Rotate the gear [A] counterclockwise and lift the stack tray upper roller unit [B].
  • Page 746 STACK TRAY 3. Push the bottom of the guide [A] and release the rear side of it. B602R956.WMF 4. Push the bottom of the guide [B] and release the front side of it. B602R957.WMF 5. Paddle [C] B602R958.WMF B602...

  • Page 747: Stack Tray Lower Roller

    STACK TRAY 1.9.3 STACK TRAY LOWER ROLLER Removal 1. Jogger fence unit (! 1.6.2) 2. Slide the jogger fences (the front fence [A] to the front, the rear fence [B] to the rear) and remove them. B602R959.WMF 3. Tray stopper [C] (2 clips) B602R960.WMF 4.
  • Page 748 STACK TRAY 5. Paper guide [A] ( [B] x 1) B602R962.WMF 6. Slide the bushing [C] ( x 2). B602R963.WMF 7. Stack tray lower roller unit [E] ( [F] x B602R964.WMF B602...

  • Page 749: Reassembly

    STACK TRAY 8. Stack tray lower roller [A] 9. Belt [B] B602R965.WMF Reassembly When reassembling, align the positions of the belt pawls [A][B]. B602R966.WMF B602...

  • Page 750: Circuit Board

    CIRCUIT BOARD 1.10 CIRCUIT BOARD 1.10.1 CONTROLLER BOARD 1. Rear cover (! 1.2.2) 2. Controller board [A] (all 's,  x 1, 3 hooks) NOTE: After replacing the controller board, remove the NVRAM on the old board and install it on the new board.
  • Page 751 CIRCUIT BOARD 3. Turn the knob [B] until you see the screw [C] (on the home position sensor board) through the opening. The home position board moves to the front when you turn the knob clockwise. 4.  [C] x 1 B602R970.WMF 5.

  • Page 752: Punch Unit, Motors, And Controller

    PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER 1.11 PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER 1.11.1 PUNCH UNIT AND PUNCH UNIT MOTOR 1. Right top cover (! 1.2.3) 2. Chad box [A] B602R993.WMF 3. Release the cables [B] ( x 1). B602R973.WMF B602...
  • Page 753 PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER 4. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1,  x 1) B602R974.WMF 5. Remove the whole punch unit from the saddle finisher. 6. Washer [B] ( x 1) 7. Base cover [C] ( x 2,  [D] x 2) (The diagram shows the view seen from the bottom.) B602R975.WMF...

  • Page 754: Registration Motor

    PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER 8. Sensor unit [A] ( x 2,  x 3) B602R976.WMF 9. Punch unit motor [B] ( x 2) B602R978.WMF 1.11.2 REGISTRATION MOTOR 1. Remove the whole punch unit from the saddle finisher. 2. Registration motor [A] (...

  • Page 755: Controller

    PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER 1.11.3 CONTROLLER 1. Rear cover (! 1.2.2) 2. Punch unit controller [A] (all 's,  x 2) NOTE: After replacing the punch unit controller, adjust the sensor voltage and specify the punch type (! 1.11.7). After replacing the EEPROM, make the controller initialize the new EEPROM (! 1.11.7).

  • Page 756: Led Board

    PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER 4. Photo sensor board [A] ( x 1) NOTE: After replacing the photo sensor board, adjust the sensor voltage (! 1.11.7). B602R982.WMF 1.11.5 LED BOARD 1. Base cover (! 1.11.1) 2. LED board [A] ( x 1,  x 1) NOTE: After replacing the LED board, adjust the sensor voltage (! 1.11.7).

  • Page 757: Chad Box Full Sensor Board And Led Board

    PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER 1.11.6 CHAD BOX FULL SENSOR BOARD AND LED BOARD 1. Punch unit controller (! 1.11.3) 2. Remove the whole punch unit from the saddle finisher. 3. Protector [A] ( x 2) B602R984.WMF 4. Sensor board [B] ( x 1) NOTE: After replacing the sensor board, adjust the sensor voltage (! 1.11.7).

  • Page 758: Adjustment And Initialization

    PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER 1.11.7 ADJUSTMENT AND INITIALIZATION Sensor Voltage You make the controller adjust the LED voltage of the sensors after you have replaced any of the following units and components: • Punch unit controller (! 1.11.3) • Photo sensor board (! 1.11.4) B602R995.WMF •...

  • Page 759: Punch Type

    PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER Punch Type After you replace the punch-unit controller, specify the punch type as follows: 1. Set the DIP switch [B] on the punch-unit controller board as follows: 1 = ON, 2 = ON, 3 = OFF, 4 = ON [J]. 2.

  • Page 760: Service Tables

    DIP SWITCH SETTINGS 2. SERVICE TABLES 2.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS Punch Controller Board The DIP switches should not be set to any combination other than those described in the table below. SW1001 Mode Description Default Sensor voltage adjustment See 1.11.7. Punch type setting See 1.11.7.

  • Page 761: Detailed Descriptions

    GENERAL LAYOUT 3. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS 3.1 GENERAL LAYOUT B602D901.WMF 1. Regular tray 11. Stack-tray transport roller 2. Jogger fence 12. Folding plate 3. Exit roller 13. Folder rollers 4. Paddle 14. Booklet exit roller 5. Stack tray stopper 15. Booklet tray 6.

  • Page 762: Drive

    DRIVE 3.2 DRIVE B602D902.WMF 1. Paddle motor 6. Rear fence motor 2. Transport motor 7. Front fence motor 3. Stapler slide motor 8. Lift motor 4. Stack-tray exit motor 9. Finisher controller 5. Stapler/folder motor B602...

  • Page 763: Controller

    CONTROLLER 3.3 CONTROLLER Finisher Punch (optional) Motor Controller board Controller board Sensor CPU (IC13) EEP-ROM (IC12) Motors Communication IC (IC11) Clutches EP-ROM (IC6) Switches Regulator IC (IC1) Sensors Main unit Controller board B602D903.WMF The finisher controller board communicates with the controllers of the optional punch unit and the copier or printer.

  • Page 764: Stack Tray

    STACK TRAY 3.4 STACK TRAY 3.4.1 SIMPLE OUTPUT Mechanism The exit roller transports the paper to the stack tray. The rollers and belts on the stack tray transport the paper to the regular tray. The finisher operates like this even when it handles one sheet of paper. Phase 1: The transport motor drives the exit roller [A] to transport the paper to the stack tray.

  • Page 765: Sort

    STACK TRAY 3.4.2 SORT The finisher can sort and stack the paper. To do this, it uses the stack tray and the regular tray. Phase 1: The exit roller transports the paper on the stack tray [A]. The front fence motor or the rear fence motor drives the jogger fence [B] to push the paper to the front or rear.

  • Page 766: Stack

    STACK TRAY 3.4.3 STACK Paddle B602D906.WMF B602D907.WMF There are four paddles [C] above the stack tray. These paddles push down the paper [B] to the stack-tray stopper [D]. This aligns the right edges of the paper (viewed from the machine front). The paddle motor [A] drives these paddles. Stack-Tray Stopper The stack-tray stopper [E] remains standing (as shown in the diagram) while the exit roller is transporting the paper to the stack tray.
  • Page 767 STACK TRAY Stack-Tray Guide Mechanism B602D906.WMF B602D909.WMF B602D910.WMF The paddle motor [A] drives the stack-tray guide. The stack-tray guide stays away from the paper (the upper position [B]) under either of the following conditions: • When the exit roller transports the paper to the stack tray •...

  • Page 768: Stack-Tray Guide Mechanism

    STACK TRAY Stack-Tray Guide Mechanism The paddle motor [A] moves the timing belts [B][G], which drive the cam [D]. The cam pushes up the first lever [C], which pushes down the second lever [H]. The second lever lowers the stack-tray guide [I].

  • Page 769: Jogger Fence

    STACK TRAY 3.4.4 JOGGER FENCE B602D911.WMF Action There are two jogger fences: the front fence [A] and the rear fence [B]. These two jogger fences adjust the position of the paper [C] on the stack tray. Drive The front-jogger-fence motor [D] and the rear-jogger-fence motor [E] drive the jogger fences.

  • Page 770: Paper Position

    STACK TRAY Paper Position To align the paper to the front of the ↑ Rear stack tray, the jogger fences operate as follows: • The rear fence [A] pushes the paper [B] to the front each time the exit roller transports the paper to the stack tray.

  • Page 771: Paper Output

    STACK TRAY 3.4.5 PAPER OUTPUT B602D906.WMF B602D915.WMF B602D914.WMF B602D916.WMF Mechanism The paper in the stack tray is transported to the regular tray as follows: 1. The paddle motor [A] moves the stack-tray guide to its lower position [G]. 2. The stack-tray exit motor [B] drives the stack-tray upper roller [F], the stack-tray lower roller [H], and the stack-tray belt [I].

  • Page 772: Stapling

    STAPLING 3.5 STAPLING 3.5.1 OVERVIEW The finisher staples the paper as follows: Phase 1: The exit roller transports the paper to the stack tray [A] until the number of papers reaches a specified number. Phase 2: The jogger fences [B] adjust the position of the paper.

  • Page 773: Stapler

    STAPLING 3.5.2 STAPLER Mechanism B602D918.WMF B602D919.WMF B602D920.WMF The stapler/folder motor [A] drives the stapler (! “Action and Drive” in section 3.5.3). Stapler Switch See “Stapler Switch” in section 3.4.3. Sensors There are three sensors inside the stapler: • Staple Home Position Sensor: The staple home position sensor detects the cam position.

  • Page 774: Positioning

    STAPLING 3.5.3 POSITIONING Front Rear B602D921.WMF Action and Drive There is one stapler [A] in the finisher. The stapler is on six rails [C][D][E][I]. The rail [C], rail [D], rail [I], and rail [J] transmit the drive power: • The rail [C] and rail [I] transmit the drive power of the stapler/folder motor. The stapler uses this power to staple the paper (! 3.5.2).

  • Page 775: Staple Position

    STAPLING Staple Position The controller counts the pulses of the stapler slide motor to calculates the distance between the ready position (! Home Position and Ready Position) and the staple position Front-End One Staple 1. Before the stapler slide motor starts, the stapler is in the ready position [C].
  • Page 776 STAPLING Two Staples 1. Before the stapler slide motor starts, the stapler is in the ready position [G]. 2. The stapler slide motor starts to slide the stapler to the front. The controller counts the pulses of the stapler slide motor.

  • Page 777: Regular Tray

    REGULAR TRAY 3.6 REGULAR TRAY B602D926.WMF Action and Drive The lift motor [I] drives the regular tray to adjust its height. Ready Position Before the stack-tray rollers and belts transport the paper to the regular tray, the lift motor sets the regular tray in the ready position: 1.

  • Page 778: Paper Sensor

    REGULAR TRAY Paper Sensor As illustrated in the previous paragraph (! Ready Position), the paper height sensor [F] can detect either the tray edge or the paper stack. Therefore, the signals from the paper height sensor are not enough to let the controller know if any paper is on the tray.

  • Page 779: Saddle Stitch

    SADDLE STITCH 3.7 SADDLE STITCH 3.7.1 OVERVIEW B602D927.WMF The saddle stitch process consists of the following four phases: 1. The stack tray aligns the paper (!3.7.2). 2. The stapler staples the paper (! 3.7.3). 3. The rollers and the sensor cooperate to transport the paper in the folding position (! 3.7.4).

  • Page 780: Stack Tray

    SADDLE STITCH 3.7.2 STACK TRAY The stack tray operates as follows: 1. The stack-tray stopper aligns the right edges of the paper in the stack tray (! “Stack-Tray Stopper” in 3.4.1). 2. The jogger fences adjust the position of the paper (! 3.4.4). 3.

  • Page 781: Paper Transport

    SADDLE STITCH 3.7.4 PAPER TRANSPORT B602D931.WMF B602D930.WMF The rollers and the sensor cooperate to transport the paper as follows: 1. When the leading edge of the paper stack reaches the folder home position sensor [A], the controller starts to count the pulses of the transport motor. 2.

  • Page 782: Paper Output

    SADDLE STITCH 3.7.5 PAPER OUTPUT Folding Plate Mechanism B602D932.WMF B602D933.WMF The folding plate is driven by the stapler/folder motor. The folding plate operates as follows: 1. The folding plate waits for the stack-tray transport roller to transport the paper. 2. When the center of the paper is set in the folding position, the stapler/folder motor drives the folding plate [C] and the folder rollers [D].

  • Page 783: Folder Rollers Mechanism

    SADDLE STITCH Folder Rollers Mechanism B602D935.WMF B602D934.WMF The folder rollers are driven by the stapler/folder motor. The folder rollers operate as follows: 1. The folder rollers [B] feed the paper pressed by the folding plate. 2. The folder rollers and the booklet exit rollers [C] feed the paper [D] and transport it to the booklet tray [E].

  • Page 784: Shape Of Folder Rollers

    SADDLE STITCH Shape of Folder Rollers Folding Plate B602D936.WMF Viewed from the front or rear, each folder rollers is a half-circle [A] except both ends and middle. This structure prevents the rollers from crumpling the paper stack. B602...

  • Page 785: Punch Unit (Optional)

    PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL) 3.8 PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL) 3.8.1 REGISTRATION Slide Unit The slide unit includes the punch motor [C], the punch [A], and paper edge and size sensors [B]. This unit is driven by the registration motor [E]. Home Position The home position of the slide unit (in other words, the home position of the paper edge sensors) is detected by the...
  • Page 786 PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL) 3. One of the paper size sensors [A] that corresponds to the paper size detects the rear end [B] of the paper. 4. When the slide unit is set in place, the registration motor stops its operations. B602D939.WMF 5.

  • Page 787: Punch

    PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL) 3.8.2 PUNCH Types of Punch Unit There are four types: • 2 holes • 2 or 3 holes (The user can select 2-hole punching or 3-hole punching from the operation panel or the printer driver.) • 4 holes •...

  • Page 788: Two Holes And Four Holes

    PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL) Two Holes and Four Holes When the finisher punches holes, the punch motor drives all punches at the same time. Phase 1 1) The punch is in the home position. The punch home position sensor [A] is on. When the first sheet of paper is set, the punch cam starts a forward turn.

  • Page 789: Two Or Three Holes

    PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL) Two or Three Holes There are five punches. When the finisher punches holes, the punch drives all punches at the same time. But three of them do not reach the paper (when the finisher is punching two holes), or two of them do not reach the paper (when the finisher is punching three holes).
  • Page 790 PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL) Phase 2 B602D948.WMF Standby B602D947.WMF Working Working punches operate as Standby punches operate as follows: follows: 4) The punch is in the home 4) When the next sheet of paper is position. The punch home set, the punch cam starts a position sensor [A] is on.
  • Page 791 FAX OPTION TYPE 2238 B603...
  • Page 793 FAX OPTION B603 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. INSTALLATION................1 1.1 PROCEDURE OVERVIEW ................1 1.2 FAX UNIT ..................... 3 Accessory Check ..................3 Installation Procedure ................4 1.3 G3 INTERFACE UNIT .................. 6 Accessory Check ..................6 Installation Procedure ................7 1.4 FAX FUNCTION UPGRADE UNIT .............
  • Page 794 3.4.2 PARAMETERS .................. 84 3.5 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES..............88 4. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS .........89 4.1 OVERVIEW ....................89 4.2 BOARDS ....................90 4.2.1 FCU ....................90 4.2.2 MBU....................91 4.2.3 NCU (US) ..................92 4.2.4 NCU (EUROPE/ASIA) ............... 93 4.2.5 SG3-D BOARD .................. 94 4.3 ADDRESS BOOK..................

  • Page 795: Installation

    PROCEDURE OVERVIEW 1. INSTALLATION 1.1 PROCEDURE OVERVIEW  WARNING 1. Never install telephone writing during a lightning storm. 2. Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations. 3. Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.
  • Page 796 PROCEDURE OVERVIEW The flowchart illustrates your installation procedure. Start Do you install the expansion memory? Install the fax unit Install the expansion to the copier. memory to the fax unit. Do you install the handset? Do you install the fax function upgrade unit? Install the handset to the copier.

  • Page 797: Fax Unit

    FAX UNIT 1.2 FAX UNIT Accessory Check Check the quantity and condition of the accessories. Description Q’ty 1. Fax key ................2 2. Fax panel................2 3. Stamp ..................1 4. G3 decal ................1 5. Serial number decal.............1 6. FCC decal (for North America model only) ......1 7.

  • Page 798: Installation Procedure

    FAX UNIT Installation Procedure  CAUTION Before installing this option, do the following: 1. If there is a printer option in the machine, print out all data in the printer buffer. 2. Press the operation switch to be the standby mode. Make sure the power LED is not lit then, turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord and the network cable.
  • Page 799 FAX UNIT 8. Attach the G3 decal [A]. B603I903.WMF 9. Install the stamp [B] to the ADF [C] (if installed). 10. Connect the telephone line to the “LINE 1” jack at the left of the machine. 11. Turn the main switch on. G307I105.WMF 12.

  • Page 800: G3 Interface Unit

    G3 INTERFACE UNIT 1.3 G3 INTERFACE UNIT Accessory Check Check the quantity and condition of the accessories. Description Q’ty 1. NCU..................1 2. Interface board ..............1 3. G3 board................1 4. Cable ...................1 5. Flat cable ................1 6. Spacer .................4 7 Screw M3 x 6 ................6 B603I908.WMF B603...

  • Page 801: Installation Procedure

    G3 INTERFACE UNIT Installation Procedure  CAUTION Before installing this option, do the following: 1. If there is a printer option in the machine, print out all data in the printer buffer. 2. Press the operation switch to be the standby mode. Make sure the power LED is not lit then, turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord and the network cable.
  • Page 802 G3 INTERFACE UNIT B604I903.WMF 3. Install the four spacers [A] to the rear of the fax-controller unit. 4. Install the interface board [B] on the spacers. 5. Install the flat cable [C] to the interface board. 6. Connect the flat cable to the fax-controller board [D] (the connector is on the front of the fax-controller board).
  • Page 803 G3 INTERFACE UNIT B604I902.WMF 9. Install the fax-controller board (with the G3 board and interface board) [A] to the fax-controller base [B] ( x 4,  x 1). 10. Install the NCU [C] to the fax-controller unit ( x 4). 11.

  • Page 804: Fax Function Upgrade Unit

    FAX FUNCTION UPGRADE UNIT 1.4 FAX FUNCTION UPGRADE UNIT  CAUTION Before installing this option, do the following: 1. Print out all data in the printer buffer. 2. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord and the network cable.

  • Page 805: Expansion Memory

    EXPANSION MEMORY 1.5 EXPANSION MEMORY  CAUTION Before installing this option, do the following: 1. Print out all data in the printer buffer. 2. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord and the network cable. G578I901.WMF Install the expansion memory [A] into the memory slot. B603...

  • Page 806: Handset

    HANDSET 1.6 HANDSET The optional handset is available for the U.S. version only. Accessory Check Check the quantity and condition of the accessories. Description Q’ty 1. Base bracket................1 2. Handset cradle ..............1 3. Handset ................1 4. Screw M3 x 6 ...............4 B603I909.WMF B603...

  • Page 807: Installation Procedure

    HANDSET Installation Procedure B603I907.WMF 1. Make two holes [A] in the scanner left cover. 2. Attach the bracket [B] enclosed with the fax unit ( x 2) as shown. 3. Remove the label [C] from the handset cradle [D]. 4. Attach the cradle to the bracket [B] ( x 2), then replace the label [C]. 5.

  • Page 808: Troubleshooting

    ERROR CODES 2. TROUBLESHOOTING 2.1 ERROR CODES If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem occurs, try to fix the problem as suggested below. Note that some error codes appear only in the error code display and on the service report. Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action...
  • Page 809 ERROR CODES Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action 0-06 The other terminal did not • Check the line connection. reply to DCS • Check the FCU - NCU connectors. • Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer settings. • Replace the NCU or FCU. •...
  • Page 810 ERROR CODES Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action 0-15 The other terminal is not The other terminal is not capable of accepting the capable of specific following functions, or the other terminal’s memory is functions. full. • Confidential rx • Transfer function •...
  • Page 811 ERROR CODES Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action 0-23 Too many errors during • Check the line connection. reception • Check the FCU - NCU connectors. • Replace the NCU or FCU. • Defective remote terminal. • Check for line noise or other line problems. •...
  • Page 812 ERROR CODES Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action 0-77 The called terminal fell back • The calling terminal could not detect a JM due to to T.30 mode, because it noise, etc. could not detect a CJ in • A network that has narrow bandwidth cannot response to JM pass JM to the other end.
  • Page 813 ERROR CODES Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action 2-12 Modem clock irregularity • Replace the FCU. 2-13 Modem initialization error • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on. • Update the modem ROM. • Replace the FCU. 2-20 Abnormal coding/decoding •...
  • Page 814 ERROR CODES Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action 5-23 Print data error when • Test the SAF memory. printing a substitute rx or • Ask the other end to resend the message. confidential rx message • Replace the FCU or optional EXMEM board. 5-24 Memory overflow after the •...
  • Page 815 ERROR CODES Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action 22-00 Original length exceeded the • Divide the original into more than one page. maximum scan length • Check the resolution used for scanning. Lower the scan resolution if possible. • Add optional page memory. 22-01 Memory overflow while •...

  • Page 816: Fax Sc Code And Error Messages

    FAX SC CODE AND ERROR MESSAGES 2.2 FAX SC CODE AND ERROR MESSAGES SC871 FCU Flash ROM Abnormal Message: Flash ROM error. Quick Dial Table is Unavailable Please call service. The flash ROM mounted in the fax unit where the address book is stored has been detected as abnormal.

  • Page 817: Service Tables

    SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 3. SERVICE TABLES  CAUTION Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing. To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power switch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then switch the main power switch off.
  • Page 818 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE SP1-XXX (Bit Switches) ! Section 3.2 Bit Switches Mode No. Function System Switch 001 – 032 00 – 1F Change the bit switches for system settings for the fax option ! Section 3.2 Bit Switches IFAX SW (! Internet Fax (IFAX) Model J-C1 Service Manual) Printer Switch 001 –...

  • Page 819: Sp2-Xxx (Ram Data)

    SERVICE PROGRAM MODE SP2-XXX (RAM Data) Mode No. Function RAM Read/Write Change RAM data for the fax board directly. ! Section 3.5 Service RAM Addresses Memory Dump G3-1 Memory Dump Print out RAM data for the fax board. ! Section 3.5 Service RAM Addresses G3-2 Memory Dump Print out RAM data for the SG3-1 board.

  • Page 820: Sp4-Xxx (Rom Versions)

    SERVICE PROGRAM MODE Mode No. Function ISDN Port Settings Select Line Select the line setting for the ISDN line. If the machine is installed to the PABX line, select “PABX”. (Japan Only) PSTN Access Number Enter the PSTN access number for ISDN line.

  • Page 821: Sp6-Xxx (Reports)

    SERVICE PROGRAM MODE SP6-XXX (Reports) Mode No. Function System Parameter List Touch the “ON” button to print the system parameter list. Service Monitor Report Touch the “ON” button to print the service monitor report. G3 Protocol Dump List G3 All Prints the protocol dump list of all Communications communications for all G3 lines.
  • Page 822 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE Mode No. Function Log List Print out All log files These log print out functions are for designer use only. Printer SC/TRAP Stored Decompression Scanner These log print out functions are for designer use only. JOB/SAF Reconstruction JBIG Fax Driver G3 CCU...

  • Page 823: Sp7-Xxx (Tests)

    SERVICE PROGRAM MODE SP7-XXX (Tests) These are the test modes for PTT approval. Function G3-1 Modem Tests G3-1 DTMF Tests Ringer Test G3-1 V34 (S2400baud) G3-1 V34 (S2800baud) G3-1 V34 (S3000baud) G3-1 V34 (S3200baud) G3-1 V34 (S3429baud) Recorded Message Test G3-2 Modem Tests G3-2 DTMF Tests G3-2 V34 (S2400baud)

  • Page 824: Bit Switches

    BIT SWITCHES 3.2 BIT SWITCHES  WARNING Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as “Not used”, as this may cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is not accepted by local regulations. Such bits are for use only in other areas, such as Japan.
  • Page 825 BIT SWITCHES System Switch 00 SP No. 1-101-001 FUNCTION COMMENTS Rx level calculation Example: 0000 32 V34 288/264 L 01 00 03 04 The four-digit hexadecimal value (N) after “L” indicates the rx level. The high byte is given first, followed by the low byte. Divide the decimal value of N by - 16 to get the rx level.
  • Page 826 BIT SWITCHES Width and A4: A4 (8.3"), no reduction reduction B4: B4 (10.1"), no reduction A3: A3 (11.7"), no reduction I/O rate 0: 0 ms/line 10: 10 ms/line 25: 2.5 ms/line 20: 20 ms/line 5: 5 ms/line 40: 40 ms/line Note: “40”...
  • Page 827 BIT SWITCHES System Switch 03 SP No. 1-101-004 FUNCTION COMMENTS Length of time that RDS is 00 - 99 hours (BCD). temporarily switched on when bits 6 and 7 of System Switch This setting is only valid if bits 6 and 7 of System 02 are set to “User selectable”...
  • Page 828 BIT SWITCHES System Switch 09 SP No. 1-101-010 FUNCTION COMMENTS Addition of image data from If this feature is enabled, the top half of the first confidential transmissions on page of confidential messages will be printed on the transmission result report transmission result reports.
  • Page 829 BIT SWITCHES System Switch 0A SP No. 1-101-011 FUNCTION COMMENTS Not used Do not change the settings. Continuous polling reception This feature allows a series of stations to be polled 0: Disabled 1: Enabled in a continuous cycle. This will continue until the polling reception file is erased.
  • Page 830 BIT SWITCHES System Switch 0F SP No. 1-101-016 FUNCTION COMMENTS Country/area code for This country/area code determines the factory functional settings (Hex) settings of bit switches and RAM addresses. However, it has no effect on the NCU parameter 00: France 11: USA settings and communication parameter RAM 01: Germany 12: Asia...
  • Page 831 BIT SWITCHES System Switch 12 SP No. 1-101-019 FUNCTION COMMENTS TTI/CIL printing position in the TTI/CIL: 08 to 92 (BCD) mm main scan direction Input even numbers only. This setting determines the print start position for the TTI and CIL from the left edge of the paper. If the TTI is moved too far to the right, it may overwrite the file number which is on the top right of the page.
  • Page 832 BIT SWITCHES System Switch 1A SP No. 1-101-026 FUNCTION COMMENTS LS RX memory remaining Sets a value of 4K. refresh value setting If the amount of memory remaining falls below 4K, documents received in memory are printed to create more space in memory. Initial value: 0x80 (512K) 00-FF (0-1020 KB: Hex) System Switch 1B - Not used (do not change the settings)
  • Page 833 BIT SWITCHES System Switch 1E SP No. 1-101-031 FUNCTION COMMENTS RTI/CSI display priority This bit determines which identifier, RTI or CSI, is 0: RTI 1: CSI displayed on the LCD while the machine is communicating in G3 non-standard mode. File No. printing 1: File numbers are not printed on any reports.
  • Page 834 BIT SWITCHES System Switch 1F SP No. 1-101-032 FUNCTION COMMENTS Not used Do not change the setting. Report printout after an original 0: When an original jams, or the SAF memory jam during SAF storage or if overflows during scanning, a report will be printed. the SAF memory fills up Change this bit to “1”...

  • Page 835: Fax Switches

    BIT SWITCHES 3.2.2 FAX SWITCHES FAX Switch 00 - Not used (do not change the settings) FAX Switch 01 SP No. 3-201-002 FUNCTION COMMENTS Scan density step value When scan density is adjusted manually away from (Text mode) the Normal setting, the threshold value for binary picture processing changes for each step from the value specified by Scanner Switch 02, by the amount programmed here.
  • Page 836 BIT SWITCHES FAX Switch 05 SP No. 3-201-006 FUNCTION COMMENTS Binary picture processing: This setting determines the threshold value for Threshold for colored binary picture processing in colored background background special original 2 special original 2 mode (when the scan density mode - Normal setting (center setting is at the center).
  • Page 837 BIT SWITCHES FAX Switch 0A SP No. 3-201-011 FUNCTION COMMENTS Not used Do not change the settings. 4 to 7 MTF filter level (Colored background special original mode) The value can be between 0 (Off) and F. For a weaker threshold, input a lower value.
  • Page 838 BIT SWITCHES FAX Switch 0D SP No. 3-201-014 FUNCTION COMMENTS Not used Do not change the settings. Scan width for A5 lengthwise or 0: The machine scans the original as 210 mm (8.5") B5 lengthwise originals width. The transmitted image has a blank area on 0: 210 mm (8.5”) the right.

  • Page 839: Printer Switches

    BIT SWITCHES 3.2.3 PRINTER SWITCHES Printer Switch 00 SP No. 1-103-001 FUNCTION COMMENTS Page separation mark 0: No marks are printed. 0: Disabled 1: If a received page has to be printed out on two 1: Enabled sheets, an asterisk inside square brackets is printed at the bottom right hand corner of the first sheet, and a “2”...
  • Page 840 BIT SWITCHES Relationship between available paper sizes and printer width used in the setup protocol Available Paper Size Printer width used in the Protocol (NSF/DIS) A4 or 8.5" x 11" 297 mm width 256 mm width A5 or 8.5" x 5.5" 216 mm width No paper available (Paper end) 216 mm width...
  • Page 841 BIT SWITCHES Printer Switch 03 SP No. 1-103-004 FUNCTION COMMENTS Page separation threshold (with reduction disabled with switch 03-0 above) If the incoming page is up to x mm longer than the length of copy paper, the excess portion will not be printed. If the incoming page is more than x mm longer than the length of copy paper, the excess portion will be printed on the next page.
  • Page 842 BIT SWITCHES Printer Switch 06 SP No. 1-103-007 FUNCTION COMMENTS Printing while a paper cassette is pulled out, when the Just Size Printing feature is Cross reference enabled. Just size printing on/off – User switch 05, bit 5 0: Printing will not start 1: Printing will start if another cassette has a suitable size of paper, based on the paper size...
  • Page 843 BIT SWITCHES Printer Switch 0E SP No. 1-103-015 FUNCTION COMMENTS Page separation 1: If all paper sizes in the machine require page 0: Enabled separation to print a received fax message, the 1: Disabled machine does not print the message (Substitute Reception is used).

  • Page 844: Communication Switches

    BIT SWITCHES 3.2.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES Communication Switch 00 SP No. 1-104-001 FUNCTION COMMENTS Compression modes available These bits determine the compression capabilities in receive mode to be declared in phase B (handshaking) of the T.30 Bit 1 Modes protocol. MH only MH/MR MH/MR/MMR MH/MR/MMR/...
  • Page 845 BIT SWITCHES Communication Switch 01 SP No. 1-104-002 FUNCTION COMMENTS If this bit is set to 0, ECM is switched off for all 0: Off 1: On communications. In addition, V.8 protocol and JBIG compression are switched off automatically. Not used Do not change the setting.
  • Page 846 BIT SWITCHES Communication Switch 02 SP No. 1-104-003 FUNCTION COMMENTS Hang-up decision when a 0: The next page will be sent even if RTN or PIN is negative code (RTN or PIN) is received. received during G3 immediate 1: The machine will send DCN and hang up if it transmission receives RTN or PIN.
  • Page 847 BIT SWITCHES Communication Switch 07 SP No. 1-104-008 FUNCTION COMMENTS Fallback from G4 to G3 if the Also see system switch 0A bit 7. other terminal is not a G4 Refer to the ISDN G4 option service manual (G4 terminal Internal Switches 17, 18, 1A, 1B, and 1C) for the 0: Disabled CPS code set (Cause Value set) that determines G4...
  • Page 848 BIT SWITCHES Communication Switch 0B SP No. 1-104-012 FUNCTION COMMENTS Use of Economy Transmission These bits determine whether the machine uses the during a Transfer operation to Economy Transmission feature when it is carrying end receivers out a Transfer operation as a Transfer Station. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled Use of Economy Transmission during a Transfer operation to...
  • Page 849 BIT SWITCHES Communication Switch 0C SP No. 1-104-013 FUNCTION COMMENTS Number of digits compared to 00 - 1F (0 to 31 digits) find the requester’s fax number After the machine receives a transfer request, the from the programmed machine compares the own telephone number sent Quick/Speed Dials when acting from the Requesting Terminal with all Quick/Speed as a Transfer Station...
  • Page 850 BIT SWITCHES Communication Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings.) Communication Switch 10 SP No. 1-104-017 FUNCTION COMMENTS Memory transmission: 01 - FE (Hex) times Maximum number of dialing attempts to the same destination Communication Switch 11 - Not used (do not change the settings.) Communication Switch 12 SP No.
  • Page 851 BIT SWITCHES Communication Switch 15 - Not used (do not change the settings) Communication Switch 16 SP No. 1-104-023 FUNCTION COMMENTS Standard G3 unit Set this bit to 0 if the user wants to use only the 0: Disabled ISDN line (option G4 unit), even for G3 1: Enabled (Japan Only) communications.
  • Page 852 BIT SWITCHES Communication Switch 1A - Not used (do not change the settings) Communication Switch 1B SP No. 1-104-028 FUNCTION COMMENTS Extension access code (0 to 7) If the PABX does not support V.8/V.34 protocol to turn V.8 protocol On/Off procedure, set this bit to “1”...

  • Page 853: G3-1 Switches

    BIT SWITCHES 3.2.5 G3-1 SWITCHES G3-1 Switch 00 SP No. 1-105-001 FUNCTION COMMENTS Monitor speaker during (0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through communication (tx and rx) the communication. Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting (0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in Disabled the T.30 protocol.
  • Page 854 BIT SWITCHES G3-1 Switch 03 SP No. 1-105-004 FUNCTION COMMENTS DIS detection number 0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same (Echo countermeasure) DIS frame twice. 0: 1 1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for the 1: 2 second DIS which is caused by echo on the line.
  • Page 855 BIT SWITCHES G3-1 Switch 04 SP No. 1-105-005 FUNCTION COMMENTS Training error detection 0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits threshold If the number of error bits in the received TCF is below this threshold, the machine informs the sender that training has succeeded.
  • Page 856 BIT SWITCHES G3-1 Switch 06 SP No. 1-105-007 FUNCTION COMMENTS Initial Rx modem rate These bits set the initial starting modem rate for Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) reception. 0 0 0 1 2.4 k 0 0 1 0 4.8 k Use a lower setting if high speeds pose problems 0 0 1 1 7.2 k during reception.
  • Page 857 BIT SWITCHES G3-1 Switch 07 SP No. 1-105-008 FUNCTION COMMENTS PSTN cable equalizer Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher (rx mode: Internal) frequencies because of the length of wire between Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting the modem and the telephone exchange.
  • Page 858 BIT SWITCHES G3-1 Switch 09 SP No. 1-105-010 FUNCTION COMMENTS ISDN cable equalizer Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher (rx mode: Internal) frequencies because of the length of wire between Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting the modem and the telephone exchange.
  • Page 859 BIT SWITCHES G3-1 Switch 0B SP No. 1-105-012 FUNCTION COMMENTS Protocol requirements: Europe The machine does not automatically reset these bits 0: Disabled 1: Enabled for each country after a country code (System Switch 0F) is programmed. Protocol requirements: Spain Change the required bits manually at installation.
  • Page 860 BIT SWITCHES G3-1 Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings) G3-1 Switch 0F SP No. 1-105-016 FUNCTION COMMENTS Alarm when an error occurred If the customer wants to hear an alarm after each in Phase C or later error communication, change this bit to “1”.

  • Page 861: G3-2 Switches

    BIT SWITCHES 3.2.6 G3-2 SWITCHES These switches require an optional G3 interface unit. G3-2 Switch 00 SP No. 1-106-001 FUNCTION COMMENTS Monitor speaker during (0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through communication (tx and rx) the communication. Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting (0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in...
  • Page 862 BIT SWITCHES G3-2 Switch 03 SP No. 1-106-004 FUNCTION COMMENTS DIS detection number 0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same (Echo countermeasure) DIS frame twice. 0: 1 1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for the 1: 2 second DIS which is caused by echo on the line.
  • Page 863 BIT SWITCHES G3-2 Switch 05 SP No. 1-106-006 FUNCTION COMMENTS Initial Tx modem rate These bits set the initial starting modem rate for Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) transmission. 0 0 0 1 2.4 k 0 0 1 0 4.8 k Use the dedicated transmission parameters if you 0 0 1 1...
  • Page 864 BIT SWITCHES G3-2 Switch 06 SP No. 1-106-007 FUNCTION COMMENTS Modem types available for The setting of these bits is used to inform the reception transmitting terminal of the available modem type for Bit 7 6 5 4 Setting the machine in receive mode. 0 0 0 1 V.27ter 0 0 1 0...
  • Page 865 BIT SWITCHES G3-2 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings) G3-2 Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings) G3-2 Switch 0A SP No. 1-106-011 FUNCTION COMMENTS Maximum allowable carrier These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop drop during image data time.
  • Page 866 BIT SWITCHES G3-2 Switch 0C SP No. 1-106-013 FUNCTION COMMENTS Pulse dialing method P = Number of pulses sent out, N = Number dialed. Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting Normal(P=N) Oslo (P=10 - N) Sweden (N+1) Not used Not used Do not change the settings.

  • Page 867: Ncu Parameters

    NCU PARAMETERS NCU PARAMETERS The following tables give the RAM addresses and the parameter calculation units that the machine uses for ringing signal detection and automatic dialing. The factory settings for each country are also given. Most of these must be changed by RAM read/write (SP2-102), but some can be changed using NCU Parameter programming (SP2-103, 104 and 105);...
  • Page 868 NCU PARAMETERS Address Function Unit Remarks 680500 Country/Area code for NCU Use the Hex value to program the parameters country/area code directly into this address, or use the decimal value to program it using SP2-103-001 Country/Area Decimal Hex France Germany Italy Austria Belgium...
  • Page 869 NCU PARAMETERS Address Function Unit Remarks 680508 PSTN dial tone detection time 20 ms If 680508 contains FF(H), the machine pauses for 680509 PSTN dial tone reset time (LOW) the pause time (address 68050A PSTN dial tone reset time (HIGH) 68050D / 68050E).
  • Page 870 NCU PARAMETERS Address Function Unit Remarks 680526 PABX busy tone frequency upper Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain limit (high byte) FF(H), tone detection is disabled. 680527 PABX busy tone frequency upper limit (low byte) 680528 PABX busy tone frequency lower Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain limit (high byte)
  • Page 871 NCU PARAMETERS Address Function Unit Remarks 68053F Country dial tone upper frequency Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain limit (HIGH) FF(H), tone detection is disabled. 680540 Country dial tone upper frequency limit (LOW) 680541 Country dial tone lower frequency If both addresses contain limit (HIGH) FF(H), tone detection is disabled.
  • Page 872 NCU PARAMETERS Address Function Unit Remarks 680554 PSTN: DTMF tone attenuation level -N x 0.5 –3.5 Function 06-2 (parameter after dialling 21). See Note 5. 680555 ISDN: DTMF tone attenuation level -dBm x 0.5 See Note 5 after dialling 680556 Not used Do not change the settings.
  • Page 873 NCU PARAMETERS Address Function Unit Remarks 680576 Number of rings until a call is Function 06-2 (parameter detected 06). The setting must not be zero. 680577 Minimum required length of the first 20 ms See Note 4. ring Function 06-2 (parameter 07).
  • Page 874 NCU PARAMETERS Address Function Unit Remarks 6805A8 Acceptable CNG detection frequency BCD (Hz) If both addresses contain lower limit (high byte) FF(H), tone detection is disabled. 6805A9 Acceptable CNG detection frequency lower limit (low byte) 6805AA Not used Do not change the setting.
  • Page 875 NCU PARAMETERS Address Function Unit Remarks 6805BE Not used Do not change the settings. 6805C6 6805C7 Bits 0 to 3 – Not used. Bit 4 – V.34 protocol dump 0: Simple, 1: Detailed (default) Bits 5 to 7 – Not used. Not used 6805C8 Do not change the...
  • Page 876 NCU PARAMETERS 6. 68054A: Europe - Between Ds opening and Di opening, France - Between Ds closing and Di opening 68054D: Europe - Between Ds closing and Di closing, France - Between Ds opening and Di closing 7. Tone signals which frequency is lower than 1500Hz (e.g., 800Hz tone for AI short protocol) refer to the setting at 6805B5h.

  • Page 877: Dedicated Transmission Parameters

    DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS 3.4 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS Each Quick Dial Key and Speed Dial Code has eight bytes of programmable parameters allocated to it. If transmissions to a particular machine often experience problems, store that terminal’s fax number as a Quick Dial or Speed Dial, and adjust the parameters allocated to that number.

  • Page 878: Parameters

    DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS 3.4.2 PARAMETERS The initial settings of the following parameters are all FF(H) - all the parameters are disabled. Switch 00 FUNCTION AND COMMENTS ITU-T T1 time (for PSTN G3 mode) If the connection time to a particular terminal is longer than the NCU parameter setting, adjust this byte.
  • Page 879 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS Switch 02 FUNCTION COMMENTS Initial Tx modem rate If training with a particular remote terminal always Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) takes too long, the initial modem rate may be too 0 0 0 0 Not used high.
  • Page 880 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS Switch 03 FUNCTION COMMENTS V.8 protocol If transmissions to a specific destination always end 0: Off at a lower modem rate (14,400 bps or lower), 1: Disabled disable V.8 protocol so as not to use V.34 protocol. 0: V.34 communication will not be possible.
  • Page 881 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS Switch 08 - Optional ISDN G4 kit required - (Japan Only) FUNCTION COMMENTS Layer 3 protocol If the setting is “Disabled”, the current setting of G4 parameter switch 6 (bit 0) is used. Bits 3 2 1 0 Setting 0 0 0 0 ISO 8208 0 0 0 1 T.70 NULL 1 1 1 1 Disabled...

  • Page 882: Service Ram Addresses

    SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES 3.5 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES  CAUTION Do not change the settings which are marked as “Not used” or “Read only.” 680001 to 680004(H) - ROM version (Read only) 680001(H) - Revision number (BCD) 680002(H) - Year (BCD) 680003(H) - Month (BCD) 680004(H) - Day (BCD) 680006 to 680015(H) - Machine’s serial number (16 digits - ASCII)
  • Page 883 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES 6800D3(H) - User parameter switch 03 (SWUSR_03: Automatic report printout) Bit 0: Transmission result report (memory transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On Bit 1: Not used Bit 2: Memory storage report 0: Off, 1: On Bit 3: Polling reserve report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On Bit 4: Polling result report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On Bit 5: Transmission result report (immediate transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On Bit 6: Polling clear report 0: Off, 1: On...
  • Page 884 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES 6800D8(H) - User parameter switch 08 (SWUSR_08) Bits 0 and 1: Not used. Bit 2: Authorized reception 0: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this feature are accepted. 1: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this feature are accepted.
  • Page 885 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES 6800DE(H) - User parameter switch 14 (SWUSR_0E) Bit 0: Message printout while the machine is in Night Printing mode 0: On, 1: Off Bit 1: Maximum document length detection 0: Double letter, 1: Longer than double-letter (well log) – up to 1,200 mm Bit 2: Batch transmission 0: Off, 1: On Bit 3: Fax mode settings, such as resolution, before a mode key (Copy/Fax/Printer /Scanner) is pressed...
  • Page 886 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES 6800E3(H) - User parameter switch 19 (SWUSR_13) Bit 0: Offset sort function for the fax (only using the shift tray on the 1,000 sheet finisher) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Bit 1: Journal format 0: The Journal is separated into transmissions and receptions 1: The Journal is separated into G3-1, G3-2, and G3-3 communications Bit 2: Action when the paper cassette that was selected by the specified cassette selection feature becomes empty.
  • Page 887 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES 6800E8(H) - User parameter switch 24 (SWUSR_18) Bits 0 and 1: File retention time (Cross reference: System switch 02 bit 4) Setting File retention impossible 24 hours File retention impossible 72 hours Bits 2 to 7: Not used 6800E9(H) - User parameter switch 25 (SWUSR_19) Bits 0 to 3: Not used Bit 4: RDS operation...
  • Page 888 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES 6802F7 to 68030A(H) - PSTN-1 CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) 68030B to 68031E(H) - PSTN-2 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII) 68031F to 680332(H) – PSTN-3 CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) 680333(H) - Number of PSTN-1 CSI characters (Hex) 680334(H) - Number of PSTN-2 CSI characters (Hex) 680335(H) - Number of PSTN-3 CSI characters (Hex) NOTE: If the number of characters is less than the maximum (20 for RTI, 64 for...
  • Page 889 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES 680364(H) - Memory Lock ID (low - BCD) 680365(H) - Memory Lock ID (high - BCD) 68036C(H) - Network type used for the service station number 0 1 (H) - PSTN-1 0 2 (H) - PSTN-2 1 0 (H) - G4 (Japan Only) 0 7 (H) - G3 auto selection 680370 to 680377(H) - Last power off time (Read only) 680370(H) - 01(H) - 24-hour clock, 00(H) - 12-hour clock (AM),...
  • Page 890 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES 680406 to 68040B(H) - Modem ROM version (Read only) 680406(H) - Part number (low) 680407(H) - Part number (high) 680408(H) - Control (low) 680409(H) - Control (high) 68040A(H) - DSP (low) 68040B(H) - DSP (high) 680464(H) - Time for economy transmission (hour in 24h clock format - BCD) 680465(H) - Time for economy transmission (minute - BCD) 680482(H) - Transmission monitor volume 00 - 07(H) 680483(H) - Reception monitor volume 00 - 07(H)

  • Page 891: Overview

    OVERVIEW 4. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS 4.1 OVERVIEW Fax Function Upgrade CCUIF Controller Expansion Memory B603D901.WMF The basic fax unit consists of three PCBs: an FCU, an MBU and an NCU. The FCU controls all the fax communications and fax features, in cooperation with the controller board.

  • Page 892: Boards

    BOARDS 4.2 BOARDS 4.2.1 FCU OHDI SW. Surge Protection TRXD Noise Over- Filter Relay RING DC Loop current Transformer Protection Surge Protection Current Sensor OHDISW CMLSW Hook0 Hook1 ExRing Ring Noise Detection Filter Circuit B603D902.WMF The FCU (Facsimile Control Unit) controls fax communications, the video interface to the base copier’s engine, and all the fax options.

  • Page 893: Mbu

    BOARDS DRAM • The 16 MB of DRAM is shared as follows. SAF memory : 4 MB Working memory : 4 MB Page memory : 8 MB • The SAF memory is backed up by a rechargeable battery. Memory back-up •...

  • Page 894: Ncu (Us)

    BOARDS 4.2.3 NCU (US) OHDI SW. Surge Protection TRXD Noise Over- Filter Relay RING DC Loop current Transformer Protection Surge Protection Current Sensor OHDISW CMLSW Hook0 Hook1 ExRing Ring Noise Detection Filter Circuit B603D903.WMF Jumpers Item Description These jumpers should be shorted when the machine is connected to a dry line.
  • Page 895 BOARDS 4.2.4 NCU (EUROPE/ASIA) SHUNT CML Relay DCLSW DO Sw. RING TRXD Current Sensor Loop OHDI Sw. DOSW OHDISW GS Sw. CMLLSW Hook0 Hook1 SHUNT GSSW Noise Filter Ring CSEL Detection RSEL Circuit ExRing B603D904.WMF Control Signals and Jumpers CSEL1 RSEL Country CN2-5...

  • Page 896: Sg3-D Board

    BOARDS 4.2.5 SG3-D BOARD NCCP Flash SDRAM Modem JBIG (RU30) DATA/ADDRESS BUS CODEC SG3-D B603D905.WMF The SG3-D board allows up to two simultaneous communications when used with the the FCU. NCCP (New Communication Control Processor) • Controls the SG3-D board •...

  • Page 897: Address Book

    ADDRESS BOOK 4.3 ADDRESS BOOK The address book (directory) for this machine combines under one user name the fax address and mail address. With Printer Scanner Unit All the address data is stored on the HDD. Up to a maximum of 2,000 items can be stored for addresses.

  • Page 898: Specifications

    SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS 1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Type: Desktop type transceiver Circuit: PSTN (max. 2ch.) PABX Connection: Direct couple Original Size: Book (Face down) Maximum Length: 432 mm [17 ins] Maximum Width: 297 mm [11.7 ins] ARDF (Face up) (single sided document) Length: 128 - 1200 mm [5.0 - 47.2 ins] Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch] (double sided document)

  • Page 899: Capabilities Of Programmable Items

    SPECIFICATIONS Memory Capacity: ECM: 128 KB Standard: 4 MB With optional Expansion Memory: 28 MB (4 MB+ 24 MB) Page Memory Standard: 8 MB (Print: 4 MB + Scanner: 4 MB) With optional Expansion Memory: 16 MB (8 MB + 8 MB) (Print 8 MB + Scanner: 8 MB) 2.
  • Page 900 SPECIFICATIONS The following table shows how the capabilities of the document memory will change after the optional Fax Function Upgrade Unit and the Expansion Memory are installed. With the Without the Expansion Expansion Memory Memory Memory Transmission file Maximum number of Without the Fax page for memory 1,000...

  • Page 901: Machine Configuration

    SPECIFICATIONS 3. MACHINE CONFIGURATION B603V901.WMF Machine Component Remarks Code Fax Unit B603 Interface Board Included in the optional G3 B604 G3 Board unit. Fax Function Upgrade Unit A892 Expansion Memory G578 Handset B433 For USA model only. B603...
  • Page 903 INTERNET FAX (IFAX)
  • Page 905 IFAX TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. INSTALLATION................1 1.1 IFAX INSTALLATION ................... 1 1.2 INITIAL SETTINGS ..................1 2. TROUBLESHOOTING ..............2 2.1 ERROR CODES FOR LAN COMMUNICATION .......... 2 2.2 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES ............7 3. SERVICE TABLES AND PROCEDURES........9 3.1 ACCESSING IFAX BIT SWITCHES ............. 9 3.2 SP1102 IFAX SWITCH................
  • Page 906 Operation at the Transfer Station............34 4.2.5 AUTOROUTING ................36 4.2.6 TRANSFER BOX................36 4.3 E-MAIL OPTIONS (SUB TX MODE) ............37 4.3.1 SUBJECT AND LEVEL OF IMPORTANCE........37 How the Subject Differs According to Mail Type ........37 Subjects Displayed on the PC ............... 37 4.3.2 E-MAIL MESSAGES................

  • Page 907: Installation

    IFAX INSTALLATION 1. INSTALLATION 1.1 IFAX INSTALLATION IFAX requires the installation of the Fax Unit and the Printer/Scanner Controllers. For details about installation, please refer to the main machine and the Fax Unit manuals for the machine. 1.2 INITIAL SETTINGS Users can set the IFAX initial settings.

  • Page 908: Troubleshooting

    ERROR CODES FOR LAN COMMUNICATION 2. TROUBLESHOOTING 2.1 ERROR CODES FOR LAN COMMUNICATION If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem occurs, try to solve the problem as suggested below. Code Meaning Cause Action 14-00 SMTP Send Error Error occurred during sending to the •...
  • Page 909 ERROR CODES FOR LAN COMMUNICATION Code Meaning Cause Action 14-09 Authorization Failed for POP-Before-SMTP or SMTP POP-Before-SMTP: Sending to SMTP authorization failed. • Check the IFAX user name Server and password. • Check that POP server is set correctly. • Check the SMTP server settings.
  • Page 910 ERROR CODES FOR LAN COMMUNICATION Code Meaning Cause Action 14-51 UCS Destination Not even one return notification can Check the address in the address Download Error be downloaded: book. • The address book was being edited. • The number for the specified destination does not exist (it was deleted or edited after the job was created).
  • Page 911 ERROR CODES FOR LAN COMMUNICATION Code Meaning Cause Action 15-16 Mail Size Receive Error The mail cannot be received because • Increase the setting that limits it is too large. the size of e-mail that can be received (in the User Tools> System Settings>...
  • Page 912 ERROR CODES FOR LAN COMMUNICATION Code Meaning Cause Action 15-64 TIFF Decompression The file received as an attachment • Ask the sender to check that Error caused the TIFF decompression the attachment was sent in error: correct TIFF format. • The TIFF format of the attachment •...

  • Page 913: Troubleshooting Procedures

    TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES 2.2 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES Use the following procedures to determine whether the machine or another part of the network is causing the problem. Communication Item Action Remarks Route • Check that the LAN cable 1. Connection with the is connected to the machine.
  • Page 914 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES Communication Item Action Remarks Route • Make sure that the client • Ask the administrator to 2. E-mail server devices which have an check. account in the server can • Send a test e-mail with send/receive e-mail. the machine’s own number as the destination.

  • Page 915: Service Tables And Procedures

    ACCESSING IFAX BIT SWITCHES 3. SERVICE TABLES AND PROCEDURES 3.1 ACCESSING IFAX BIT SWITCHES 1. Ensure that the machine is in standby mode. 2. Press , enter   with the 10-key pad, then hold down  for more than 3 seconds. The SP mode main menu opens. 3.

  • Page 916: Sp1102 Ifax Switch

    SP1102 IFAX SWITCH 3.2 SP1102 IFAX SWITCH Only one SP number is used to access IFAX bit switches. These bit switches are described in the tables below. IFAX SW 1102 1 Bits 0~6: Original Width of TX Attachment File This setting sets the maximum size of the original that the destination can receive. (Bits 3~7 are reserved for future use or not used.) 0: On 1: Off...
  • Page 917 SP1102 IFAX SWITCH IFAX SW 1102 2 Bits 0~ 6: Original Line Resolution of TX Attachment File This setting sets the maximum resolution of the original that the destination can receive. 0: Not selected 1: Selected Note: If more than one of these three bits is set to “1”, the higher resolution has priority.
  • Page 918 SP1102 IFAX SWITCH IFAX SW 1102 3 Bit 0: RX Text Mail Header Processing This setting determines whether the header information is printed with text e-mails when they are received. 0: Prints only text mail. 1: Prints mail header information attached to text mail. •...
  • Page 919 SP1102 IFAX SWITCH IFAX SW 1102 4 Bit 0: Original Output at Transfer Station This setting determines whether the original is output at the transfer station when it is received from the sender that initiated the transfer transmission. This feature is the same as for G3 transfer transmissions.
  • Page 920 SP1102 IFAX SWITCH IFAX SW 1102 6 Bit 0: Mail Addresses of SMTP Broadcast Recipients Determines whether the e-mail addresses of the destinations that receive transmissions broadcasted using SMTP protocol are recorded in the Journal. For example: "1st destination + Total number of destinations: 9" in the Journal indicates a broadcast to 9 destinations.
  • Page 921 SP1102 IFAX SWITCH IFAX SW 1102 13 Not Used. IFAX SW 1102 14 Not Used IFAX SW 1102 15 Not Used IFAX SW 1102 16 Bit 0: Delivery Method for SMTP RX Files This setting determines whether files received with SMTP protocol are delivered or output immediately.

  • Page 922: Firmware Update Procedure

    FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE 3.3 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE When you need to update the firmware for IFAX, follow the firmware update procedures described in the main machine Service Manual. IFAX...

  • Page 923: Ifax Ram Addresses

    IFAX RAM ADDRESSES 3.4 IFAX RAM ADDRESSES Parameter Function Data Format Address Comments 69FEAE Mail Address Mail address of the ASC: 128 bytes 128 x 3 area fax account. provided, but only the first is used. 6A002E User Name User name of the fax ASC: 64 bytes 64 x 3 area account.

  • Page 924: Detailed Section Descriptions

    INTERNET FAX 4. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS 4.1 INTERNET FAX 4.1.1 INTERNET FAX FEATURES The Internet fax produced by Ricoh is also known as IFAX. An Internet fax converts fax hard copy document data to e-mail format and transmits the data over the Internet. Another IFAX or a PC can receive the e-mail sent by an IFAX.

  • Page 925: Dns Service

    INTERNET FAX The following functions are supported with standard fax transmission, but not with Internet faxing. These functions are not supported by e-mail transmission: • Immediate Transmission • Confidential Transmission • ID Transmission • Polling Transmission • Chain Dial • Transmission by F-Code (SUB) - e-mail protocol cannot specify an F-Code •...

  • Page 926: Internet Mail Communication

    INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION 4.2 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION 4.2.1 MAIL TRANSMISSION Sending T erminal SMT P IFAX Server E-mail Router Internet POP/IMAP IFAX Server E-mail Router IFAXD601.WMF Procedure Scanned documents are sent as electronic mail (e-mail). All messages are sent using memory transmission. All e-mail transmissions are controlled using Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) procedures.

  • Page 927: Results

    INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION receive reports of errors that occurred between the SMTP server and the receiving terminal. The interval between attempts to resend mail to the same destination when an SMTP error occurs is the same as for G3 fax transmission. To view what happens when an error occurs when the machine is receiving, refer to the Mail Reception section.

  • Page 928: Secure Internet Transmission

    INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION Secure Internet Transmission To transmit e-mail via the Internet more securely, use SMTP authentication, and POP before SMTP for IFAX. • SMTP Authentication. SMTP Authentication requires user authentication before they can access the server. This prevents unauthorized access to the server. To use SMTP authentication, your server must support CRAM-MD5, PLAIN, or LOGIN.

  • Page 929: Mail Reception

    INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION 4.2.2 MAIL RECEPTION SMTP IFAX Server E-mail Router Receiving Terminal Internet IFAX Server E-mail Router IFAXD912.WMF This machine supports three types of e-mail reception: • POP3 (Post Office Protocol Ver. 3.) • IMAP4 (Internet Messaging Access Protocol) •...

  • Page 930: Characteristics Of Pop3/Imap4 Reception

    INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION Characteristics of POP3/IMAP4 Reception Here are some general characteristics of POP3/IMAP4 receiving: • No MX record registration. There is no need to register the machine in the MX record of the DNS server. • Power can be switched off. As long as the machine is not receiving mail, mail stored in the mail server is not lost when the power is switched off.

  • Page 931: Smtp Reception Characteristics

    INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION SMTP Reception Characteristics • Expanded RX mail delivery. The Off Ramp Gateway feature allows expansion for RX mail delivery to a G3 fax. The machine transfers incoming mail is sent to the G3 fax specified by the local part. For example, in a destination address specified as: fax=0454778907@cl01.dom1.ricoh.co.jp the “local part”...

  • Page 932: Delivery: Transferring Mail Received With Smtp

    INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION Delivery: Transferring Mail Received With SMTP (Off Ramp Gateway) Overview If the address of the mail received with SMTP contains the following information, it can be delivered to another G3 fax: Fax = “ Delivery Number”@”IFAX Host Name.Domain” SMTP SMTP IFAX...
  • Page 933 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION How to Set Up Mail Delivery The sender must set the mail address in the following format: 1) When dialing using a fax number fax=<Delivery Destination Fax Number>@<IFAX Host Name>.<Domain Name> Example: ! Delivers to fax number 0454771459 fax=0454771459@cl01.dom1g.ricoh.
  • Page 934 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION Auth. E-mail RX In order to limit access to mail delivery with IFAX, the addresses of senders must be limited using the Access Limit Entry. Only one entry can be registered. 1) Access Limit Entry For example, to limit access to @IFAX.ricoh.co.jp: gts@IFAX.ricoh.co.jp Matches and is delivered.

  • Page 935: Handling Mail Reception Errors

    INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION Handling Mail Reception Errors Errors during POP3/IMAP4 procedures When an error of this type occurs, the machine stops receiving and the message stays in the server. An error report is output. After a prescribed interval, the machine calls the server and starts to receive, starting with the interrupted message.

  • Page 936: Printing Received Mail

    INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION Printing Received Mail To print received e-mail: • The machine detects whether it has received a TIFF-F format image, then prints • Text in US ASCII or ISO 8859 X format can also be printed. When a line of text is longer than the paper width, the excess data will be truncated and lost.

  • Page 937: Mail Broadcasting (E-Mail And G3 Fax Are Combined)

    INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION 4.2.3 MAIL BROADCASTING (E-MAIL AND G3 FAX ARE COMBINED) G 3 Transmissions E-mail Transmissions (PSTN) (LAN/Internet) SMT P IFAX Server E-mail transmission IFAXD913.WMF The machine can send the same message to several destinations in one operation. Some destinations can be G3 faxes and others can be e-mail. For the G3 fax transmissions, each address has to be dialed separately.

  • Page 938: Transfer Request

    INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION 4.2.4 TRANSFER REQUEST Operation at the Transfer Requester Request by Mail Transfer Requester R: Router SMT P IFAX Server Individual G3 E-mail Transmissions (PSTN) Transfer Station IFAX Server E-mail E-mail End Receivers SMT P E-mail Server (several destinations, Individual E-mail G3 End Receivers Transmissions...
  • Page 939 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows: Field Content From E-mail address of the requesting terminal Destination address (Transfer Station address) Backup mail address Subject From TSI (Fax Message No. xxxx) Content-Type Multipart/mixed Text/Plain (for a text part), image/tiff (for attached files) Content-Transfer-Encoding Base 64, 7-Bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable...

  • Page 940: Operation At The Transfer Station

    INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION Operation at the Transfer Station Request by Mail Transfer Requester R: Router SMTP IFAX Server Individual G3 E-mail Transmissions (PSTN) Transfer Station POP/IMAP IFAX Server E-mail E-mail End Receivers SMT P E-mail Server (several destinations, Individual E-mail G3 End Receivers one transmission) Transmissions...
  • Page 941 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION Request by Fax G3 End Receivers G 3 Transmission (Transfer Request) G3 FAX PSTN G 3 Transmission (Report) Requesting Term inal E-mail End Transfer SMT P IFAX Receivers Station Server E-mail IFAXD916.WMF When the machine receives a transfer request by G3 fax, it sends the message to the e-mail and G3 end receivers in the same way as for a request by mail.

  • Page 942: Transfer Box

    INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION 4.2.5 AUTOROUTING G 3 T ransmission G 3 Fax PST N SU B cod e: 1111 SM T P IFAX Server e-mail Personal C o de 1111: abc@ ricoh.com C lient E-m ail ad dress: abc@ ricoh.com IFAXD918.WMF When a G3 fax message is received with a SUB code (max.

  • Page 943: Subject And Level Of Importance

    E-MAIL OPTIONS (SUB TX MODE) 4.3 E-MAIL OPTIONS (SUB TX MODE) The following features are available as options for mail sending: entering a subject, designating the level of importance, confirming reception of the mail. 4.3.1 SUBJECT AND LEVEL OF IMPORTANCE You can enter a subject message with: Sub TX Mode>...
  • Page 944 E-MAIL OPTIONS (SUB TX MODE) 4.3.2 E-MAIL MESSAGES After entering the subject, you can enter a message with: Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options An e-mail message (up to 5 lines) can be pre-registered with: User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Program/Change/Delete E-mail Message Limitations on Entries Item...
  • Page 945 E-MAIL OPTIONS (SUB TX MODE) 4.3.3 MESSAGE DISPOSITION NOTIFICATION (MDN) The network system administrator can confirm whether a sent mail has been received correctly or not. This confirmation is done in four steps. 1. Send request for confirmation of mail reception. To enable or disable this request (known as MDN): Sub TX Mode>...

  • Page 946: Handling Mail

    E-MAIL OPTIONS (SUB TX MODE) Handling Mail Handling Mail on the Send Side When mail is sent, a “Disposition Notification To” notation is included in the header as a request for confirmation that the mail was received. X-Mozilla Status : 0001 X-Mozilla Status2 : 00000000 Message-ID...

  • Page 947: Sm Ifax

    E-MAIL OPTIONS (SUB TX MODE) Setting up the Receiving Party The receiving party will respond to the confirmation request if: 1) The “Disposition Notification To” field is in the received mail header (automatically inserted in the 4th line in the upper table on the previous page, if MDN is enabled), and 2) Sending the disposition notification must be enabled (User Parameter Setting SW21 (15 [H]) Bit 1 for this model).
  • Page 948 E-MAIL OPTIONS (SUB TX MODE) Report Sample DATE TIME ADDRESS MODE TIME PAGE RESULT MAY. 5 10:15 fuser_01@dom1g. ricoh. co. Mail SM 0'09" 10:16 fuser_01@dom1g. ricoh. co. Mail SMQ 0'05" 10:17 s_tadashi@dom1g. ricoh. co. Mail SMQ 0'09" 10:19 m_masataka@dom1g. ricoh. co. Mail SMA 0'05" IFAXD921.WMF IFAX...

  • Page 949: Ifax Specifications

    SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS 1. IFAX SPECIFICATIONS Type Protocol Fax Unit and Printer/Scanner Unit (Supported by TCP/IP protocol) Transmission: Connectivity IETF RFC821 SMTP procedure Local area network Reception: Ethernet 100base-Tx/10base-T IETF RFC1725 POP3 procedure Connection IETF RFC2026 IMAP4 procedure 100base-Tx/10base-T direct Data rate connection 100 Mbps(100base-Tx) Resolution...
  • Page 951 DataOverwriteSecurity Unit Type A/B694-01 Type B/B692-01...
  • Page 953 DataOverwriteSecurityUnit B692/B694 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. INSTALLATION................1 1.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................. 1 DataOverwriteSecurity (DOS) Unit Type A ..........1 DataOverwriteSecurity (DOS) Unit Type B ..........1 1.2 BEFORE YOU BEGIN.................. 2 1.3 SEAL CHECK AND REMOVAL..............2 1.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ..............3 2.
  • Page 955  IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY 1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals, make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged. 2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible. 3.
  • Page 956 NOTES SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL FOR DISPOSAL 1. Never incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly when exposed to an open flame. 2. Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductors in accordance with local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.) 3.
  • Page 957 What This Manual Contains This manual describes the DataOverwriteSecurity (DOS) Unit Type A/B for: • B147/B149 • B135/B138 • B089/B093. The DOS unit is an optional DIMM (or SD card) that contains special firmware. At the end of every job, this special firmware overwrites every cluster in temporary storage on the HDD twice with random data.

  • Page 959: Accessory Check

    2. Keytops for B089/B093 (Blank Covers) ....... 2 3. Keytops for B135/B138 (Blank Covers) ....... 2 4. Operation Instructions............1 DataOverwriteSecurity (DOS) Unit Type B This module is for B147/B149. Description Q'ty 1. SD Card................1 2. Keytop (Blank Covers)............2 3.

  • Page 960: Before You Begin

    4. Make sure that you have the correct security module for the machine. The machine model requires either the DIMM type or the SD Card type. Model Security Module Required B135/B138 e/f DOS Unit Type A (DIMM) B089/B093 DOS Unit Type A (DIMM) B147/B149 DOS Unit Type B (SD Card) B692/B694...

  • Page 961: Installation Procedure

    10. Disconnect the Network cable (RJ45 connection) if NIB is installed B089/B093 B147/B149 B135/B138 B692I902.WMF 11. Install either the DIMM [A] or the SD Card [B]: • The DIMM is installed for B135/B138 or B089/B093. • The SD Card is installed for B147/B149. B692/B694...

  • Page 962: Installation Procedure

    • If the PostScript 3 option is installed, remove the Printer/Scanner card from Slot 1 and install the DOS option SD card in Slot 1. • Follow the procedure in the B147/B149 Service Manual, section 5.7 SD Card Appli Move, to move the Printer/Scanner application data to the DOS option card.

  • Page 963: Preventive Maintenance

    2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE There are no preventive maintenance checks or procedures for the DataOverwriteSecurity Unit. B692/B694...

  • Page 964: Replacement And Adjustment

    3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3.1 HDD 1. Switch the operation power switch off. 2. Switch the main power switch off. 3. Disconnect the power cord from the power supply. 4. Replace the HDD. (Refer to the section “3. Replacement and Adjustment” in the Service Manual of the appropriate machine.

  • Page 965: Nvram

    6. Insert a blank IC card or SD card into the controller slot: • B135/B138, B089/B093 require the IC card. • B147/B149 requires the SD card. 7. Connect the power cord to the power supply. 8. Switch the main switch on.
  • Page 966 NVRAM 16. Switch the main power switch off, then switch it on again. 17. Insert the IC card or SD card with the uploaded NVRAM data into the controller slot. 18. Enter the SP mode and do SP5825 (NVRAM Data Download). 19.

  • Page 967: Dimm Or Sd Card

    8. Install either the DIMM or the SD Card in the controller slot: • B135/B138, B089/B093 require the DIMM. • B147/B149 requires the SD card. 9. Connect the network cable if the NIB option is installed. 10. Connect the Fax cable if the fax option is installed.

  • Page 968: Troubleshooting

    SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS 4. TROUBLESHOOTING  CAUTION Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing. To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power switch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then switch the main power switch off.

  • Page 969: Service Call Conditions

    After the command was sent to this chip, the chip generated an unexpected response. SC865 HDD Access Error B135/B138, B089/B093, B147/B149 During operation, the HDD Hard Disk Failure generated an error. • Do SP5832 001 (HDD Formatting - All) • Do SP5832 002 (HDD Formatting - IMH) •...

  • Page 970: Overwrite Erase Icon Not Displayed

    OVERWRITE ERASE ICON NOT DISPLAYED 4.2 OVERWRITE ERASE ICON NOT DISPLAYED 09/09/2003 14:13 Origi Total Copies B692T901.WMF If the overwrite erase icon [A] is not displayed, check the following SPs and make sure that they are set correctly. Copy SPs SP No.

  • Page 971: Service Tables

    COPY SP SERVICE TABLES 5. SERVICE TABLES Service Table Key Notation What it means [range / default / step] Example: [-9 ~ +9 / +3.0 / 0.1 mm step]. The setting can be adjusted in the range ±9, value reset to +3.0 after an NVRAM reset, and the value can be changed in 0.1 mm steps with each key press.

  • Page 972: Copy Sp Service Tables

    COPY SP SERVICE TABLES 5.1 COPY SP SERVICE TABLES 5801 1 Memory Clear - All Clear Resets all data for process control and all software counters, and restores all modes and adjustments to their default values. To execute, hold down  for over 3 seconds, and then turn the copier off and on again.

  • Page 973: Print Service Table

    PRINT SERVICE TABLE 5846 UCS Settings UCS (User Control Service) is the software that manages user codes, the fax address book, the scan-to-email address book, and the scan-to-folder address book. 5846 50* Initialize All Directory Info. Clears all directory information managed by UCS, including all user codes 5871 HDD Function Disable...

  • Page 974: Details

    6. DETAILS When an original is scanned or printed, the data for the job is stored temporarily on the hard disk for jam recovery. After the copy or print job finishes, some of this temporary data remains on the HDD at random locations until it is overwritten by the next job.
  • Page 975 Overwrite B692D902A.WMF HDD Data A copy or print job always starts writing data to disk, starting with the clusters at the outer edge [A] and progressing toward the center. The overwrite, on the other hand, always begins at the center cluster [B] and progresses toward the edge.
  • Page 976 HDD Data Original Data 10 11 14 15 17 18 19 20 27 28 30 31 B692D903A.WMF 1. A copy job writes data to the HDD as far as cluster 32 [A]. 10 11 14 15 17 18 19 20 27 28 30 31 32 B692D904A.WMF...
  • Page 977 10 11 14 15 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 B692D905A.WMF 3. In this example, a copy job starts when the overwrite reaches cluster 21 [C] and overwriting stops. 10 11 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23...
  • Page 978 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 26 27 30 31 32 B692D907A.WMF 5. As soon as the overwrite progresses as far as cluster 1, it starts again from cluster [E] and continues through 32, 31, and so on. 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20...

  • Page 979: Specifications

    The PS3 function cannot be used with the Type A DIMM because the Type A DIMM is inserted in the PS3 slot. However, B147/B149 is provided with an SD card merge function, so the PS3 function can be used with the Type B.
  • Page 980 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS...
  • Page 981 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN BULLETIN NUMBER: B147/B149 - 001 05/14/2004 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER – DSc332/DSc338 LANIER - LD232c/LD238c RICOH – Aficio 2232C/2238C SAVIN – C3224/C3828 SUBJECT: SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied.
  • Page 982 SEE SECTION B602 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS FAX OPTION B603 SEE SECTION B603 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS INTERNET FAX (IFAX) SEE SECTION IFAX FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS DataOverwriteSecurity Unit B692/B694 SEE SECTION B692/B694 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS xiii B147/B149...
  • Page 983 Rev. 05/2004 INSTALLATION AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER B597 FAX OPTION B603 INTERNET FAX (IFAX) PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT B598 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B600 TROUBLESHOOTING TWO-TRAY FINISHER B599 BOOKLET FINISHER B602 SERVICE TABLES DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS SPECIFICATIONS ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT B601 DataOverwriteSecurity Unit B692/B694...
  • Page 984 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN BULLETIN NUMBER: B147/B149 – 002 06/02/2004 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER - DSc332/DSc338 LANIER - LD232c/LD238c RICOH - AFICIO 2232C/2238C SAVIN - C3224/C3828 SUBJECT: SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied.
  • Page 985 ** Requires Engine firmware 1.09C or later. 1-106 [Temperature Display] Fusing Temperature Display (Heating or Pressure) Displays the current temperature of the heating and pressure rollers. 1-106-1 Heat Roller [ 0 to 200 / - / 5°C/step] 1-106-2 Pressure Roller B147/B149 5-10...
  • Page 986 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN BULLETIN NUMBER: B147/B149 - 003 06/10/2004 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER – DSC332/DSC338 LANIER – LD232C/LD238C RICOH – AFICIO 2232C/2238C SAVIN – C3224/C3828 SUBJECT: COLD OFFSET (POOR FUSING) SYMPTOM: Cold offset (poor fusing) may occur when all of the following conditions are met: 1.
  • Page 987 PRODUCTION COUNTERMEASURE: The B147/B149 Engine firmware version 1.11 or later has been modified to ensure that cold offset does not occur without changing the warm-up time. This firmware modification has been in production starting in April 2004.
  • Page 988 Engine main firmware modification (applied from v1.09b) II. FIELD COUNTERMEASURE: Upgrade the engine-main firmware to v1.09b, or Change SP5-121 to “1: Paper Exit.” All B147/B149 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new firmware v1.09b, or later installed during production. MODEL NAME...
  • Page 989 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN BULLETIN NUMBER: B147/B149 - 005 06/11/2004 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER – DSc332/DSc338 LANIER – LD232c/LD238c RICOH – AFICIO 2232C/2238C SAVIN – C3224/C3828 SUBJECT: SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied.
  • Page 990 6.2.3 PROCESS CONTROL SELF CHECK PROCEDURE ....6-10 Step 1: VSG Adjustment ..............6-10 Step 2: ID Sensor Solid Pattern Generation ........6-11 Step 3: Sensor Pattern Detection ............6-11 Step 4: Toner Amount Calculation ............6-11 Step 5: VD, VB, VL Selection and VREF Adjustment ......6-12 B147/B149...
  • Page 991 018) To enable the New Unit Set program (and to replace a unit), perform as follows: 1. Start the SP mode (☛ 5.1.1). 2. Select a program from SP7-804-011 to 018. 3. Select "EXECUTE." 4. Quit the SP mode. B147/B149...
  • Page 992 Waste Toner Bottle Fusing Fusing Unit ☛ 2.1 Oil Supply Unit Paper Path Registration Sensor Blower brush Duplex Unit Inverter Roller Damp cloth Transport Roller Damp cloth Inverter Sensor Blower brush Miscellaneous Distributed with development Dust Filter unit-K Breaker B147/B149...
  • Page 993 1. The BCU receives a signal • Main board problems 4. Replace the BCU or main board of Bank which is generated by the SC 622 in the peripherals peripherals. peripherals only just after communication the main switch is turned error 4-29 B147/B149...
  • Page 994 ⇒ unit. You set “1: Enable” before installing a 5-999-3 PCU: M new unit. 5-999-4 PCU: C 5-999-5 Dev. U: Bk 5-999-6 Dev. U: Y 5-999-7 Dev. U: M 5-999-8 Dev. U: C 5-999-9 Fuser 5-63 B147/B149...
  • Page 995 NOTE: The LCT is counted as the 3rd feed station. 7-804-1 Paper 7-804-2 PCU [K] 7-804-3 PCU [Y] 7-804-4 PCU [M] 7-804-5 PCU [C] 7-804-6 Dev. [K] 7-804-7 Dev. [Y] 7-804-8 Dev. [M] 7-804-9 Dev. [C] 7-804-10 Oil Supply 7-804-11 PF By-pass 7-804-12 PF Tray 1 5-73 B147/B149...

  • Page 996: Updating Firmware

    1. If the SD card is blank, copy the entire “romdata” folder onto the SD card. 2. If the card already contains the “romdata” folder, copy the “B149” folder onto the card. 3. If the card already contains folders up to “B149”, simply copy the necessary firmware files (e.g. B149xxxx.fwu) into this folder. B147/B149 5-140...
  • Page 997 The diameter of the drum is 30 mm (circumference: about 94.25 mm). The photoconductor gap between a PCU and the corresponding development roller is determined by the drum positioning plate and the rear shaft, and is not adjustable in the field. 6-49 B147/B149...
  • Page 998 The TD sensor and center ID sensor control toner density. Each development unit has a TD sensor. The diameter of the development roller is 18 mm (circumference about 56.5 mm). B147/B149 6-58...
  • Page 999 2,500 sheets before the life of the oil supply unit runs out. This timing can be changed with SP7-905-14. . When the number has reached this ⇒ value, an error message is displayed and the copier stops its operation. B147/B149 6-96...
  • Page 1000 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN BULLETIN NUMBER: B147/B149 - 006 06/14/2004 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER – DSC332/DSC338 LANIER – LD232C/LD238C RICOH – AFICIO 2232C/2238C SAVIN – C3224/C3828 SUBJECT: TROUBLESHOOTING COPY QUALITY ISSUES SYMPTOM: A RAM access error sometimes occurs when the controller attempts to access the SDRAM DIMM, resulting in one of the faulty images shown below (band shifting along the main scan direction, solid banding, stretched banding).
  • Page 1001 Tech Service Bulletin No B147/B149 – 006 TROUBLESHOOTING Replace the controller board when any of the following image symptoms are reported. 1. Printer Image 2. Printer Image Page 2 of 4...
  • Page 1002 Tech Service Bulletin No B147/B149 – 006 3. Copy Image 4. Scan-to-Email Image (Color) 5. Scan-to-Email Image (Grayscale) 6. Scan-to-Email Image (Text) Page 3 of 4...
  • Page 1003 Tech Service Bulletin No B147/B149 – 006 7. Scan-to-Email Image (Text/Photo) UNITS AFFECTED: All B147/B149 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new style Controller, installed during production MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER Gestetner DSc332 K0231200001 Savin C3224...
  • Page 1004 Production Countermeasure (Permanent): The following controller board has been changed to ensure proper communication between the controller and SDRAM DIMM. GENERAL: The following part information is being issued for all B147/B149/B190 Parts Catalogs. REFERENCE OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO.
  • Page 1005 Tech Service Bulletin No. B147/B149/B190 – 006 REISSUE TROUBLESHOOTING Replace the controller board when any of the following image symptoms are reported. 1. Printer Image 2. Printer Image Page 2 of 4...
  • Page 1006 Tech Service Bulletin No. B147/B149/B190 – 006 REISSUE 3. Copy Image 4. Scan-to-Email Image (Color) 5. Scan-to-Email Image (Grayscale) 6. Scan-to-Email Image (Text) Page 3 of 4...
  • Page 1007 Tech Service Bulletin No. B147/B149/B190 – 006 REISSUE 7. Scan-to-Email Image (Text/Photo) UNITS AFFECTED: All B147/B149 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new style Controller, installed during production MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER Gestetner DSc332 K0231200001...
  • Page 1008 The pressure between the oil supply pad and the oil supply roller has been optimized to further improve the uniformity of oil supply from the roller. The following part update is being issued for all B147/B149 Parts Catalogs. Please update your parts catalog with the following information.

  • Page 1009: Replacement Procedure

    A lubricant bar has been added to the PCU cleaning brush to further ensure that additives contained in paper do not stick to the drum surface. The following part update is being issued for all B147/B149 Parts Catalogs. Please update your parts catalog with the following information.
  • Page 1010 Tech Service Bulletin No. B147/B149 – 008 UNITS AFFECTED: All B147/B149 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new style PCU installed during production. MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER Gestetner DSc332 K0240500001 Lanier LD232c Ricoh Aficio 2232C...
  • Page 1011 A lubricant bar has been added to the PCU cleaning brush to further ensure that additives contained in paper do not stick to the drum surface. The following part update is being issued for all B147/B149 Parts Catalogs. Please update your parts catalog with the following information.
  • Page 1012 Tech Service Bulletin No. B147/B149/B190 – 008 REISSUE UNITS AFFECTED: All B147/B149 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new style PCU installed during production. MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER Gestetner DSc332 K0240500001 Lanier LD232c Ricoh Aficio 2232C...
  • Page 1013 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN BULLETIN NUMBER: B147/B149 – 009 07/19/2004 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER - DSc332/DSc338 LANIER - LD232c/LD238c RICOH - AFICIO 2232C/2238C SAVIN - C3224/C3828 SUBJECT: SC285, SC387, SC388 OR SC389 SYMPTOM: An SC285, SC387, SC388, or SC389 can sometimes occur on machines that printout primarily in B/W mode (total color to B/W page ratio of 1:100), such as when using the machine primarily as a FAX.
  • Page 1014 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN BULLETIN NUMBER: B147/B149 – 009 REISSUE 01/11/2005 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER - DSc332/DSc338 LANIER - LD232c/LD238c RICOH - AFICIO 2232C/2238C SAVIN - C3224/C3828 SUBJECT: SC285, SC387, SC388 OR SC389 SYMPTOM: An SC285, SC387, SC388, or SC389 can sometimes occur on machines that printout primarily in B/W mode (total color to B/W page ratio of 1:100), such as when using the machine primarily as a FAX.
  • Page 1015 This bulletin contains the additional parts information and service manual changes from the other models in the series, the B147 and B149. Please update your B147/B149 Parts Catalog and Service Manual with the information supplied in this bulletin.
  • Page 1016 Tech Service Bulletin No. B147/B149/B190 – 010 SERVICE MANUAL UPDATE: The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied. ⇒ The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow PAGES: • Legend Updated Information (Legend) •...
  • Page 1017 LEGEND PRODUCT CODE COMPANY GESTETNER LANIER RICOH SAVIN B147 DSc322 LD232c Aficio 2232C C3224 B149 DSc338 LD238c Aficio 2238C C3828 B190 DSc328 LD228c Aficio 2228C C2820 G329 Platen Cover Type 3800C B597 Auto Reverse Document Feeder DF77 B601 1-Tray Paper Feed Unit PS540...
  • Page 1018 LEGEND PRODUCT CODE COMPANY GESTETNER LANIER RICOH SAVIN B147 DSc332 LD232c Aficio 2232C C3224 B149 DSc338 LD238c Aficio 2238C C3828 B190 DSc328 LD228c Aficio 2228C C2820 DOCUMENTATION HISTORY REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS 01/2004 Original Printing 09/2004 B190 update...
  • Page 1019 PM timing sooner). Chart: A4 (LT)/5% Mode: 3 copies/original (prints/job) Environment: Normal temperature and humidity Yield may change depending on circumstances and print conditions. Symbol key: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricate, I: Inspect B147/B149 Copier B190 120K 140K Item...
  • Page 1020 Exit Roller Damp cloth; alcohol Inverter Roller Damp cloth; alcohol Idle Rollers Damp cloth; alcohol NOTE: 240k copies (= 80k originals x 3 copies/original) (B147/B149) 216k copies (= 72k originals x 3 copies/original) (B190) One-Tray Paper Feed Unit Item 240K Remarks...
  • Page 1021 Boot-up from flash Boot-up from IC card 2 to 4 Factory Use Only: Keep these switches OFF. BCU Board Set the DIP switch on the BCU as listed in the table. DIP Switch Model B147/B190 B149 North/South America Europe Asia Taiwan Korea When the DIP switch is incorrectly set, one of the following error occurs: •...
  • Page 1022 Left rear corner position: Copy speed: Normal B147: 24 cpm (color) or 32 cpm (black & white) B149: 28 cpm (color) or 38 cpm (black & white) B190: 20 cpm (color) or 28 cpm (black & white) OHP/Thick B147, B149, B190: 10 cpm (color/black & white) ADF 1 to 1 B147: 24 cpm (color) or 32 cpm (black &...
  • Page 1023 10 ppm Monochrome 1,800 x 600 dpi 32 ppm 10 ppm 1,200 x 1,200 dpi 28 ppm 10 ppm B147 600 x 600 dpi 24 ppm 10 ppm Color 1,800 x 600 dpi 24 ppm 10 ppm 1,200 x 1,200 dpi...
  • Page 1024 1 bit or 8 bits/pixel each for RGB Scanning B/W: 28 ppm LEF Throughput Color: 24 ppm LEF (ARDF mode): Interface: Ethernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T for TCP/IP), IEEE 1394, Wireless LAN Compression B&W: TIFF (MH, MR, MMR) Method: Gray Scale, Full Color: JPEG B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 1025 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN BULLETIN NUMBER: B147/B149/B190 – 011 10/19/2004 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER – DSc332/DSc338/DSc328 LANIER – LD232c/LD238c/LD228c RICOH – AFICIO 2232C/2238C/2228C SAVIN – C3224/C3828/C2820 SUBJECT: “ADD PAPER TO TRAY 1 (2)” WITH PAPER IN THE TRAY SYMPTOM: The message “Add paper to Tray1 (2)” is displayed even if there is paper in paper tray 1 or 2.
  • Page 1026 Use this procedure to attach the tape (P/N: G0123897 X 4). 1. Remove the rear cover (See B147/B149/B190 Service Manual 3.5.1). 2. Remove the high voltage supply unit (See B147/B149/B190 Service Manual 3.13.6). 3. Remove the sub power supply unit (See B147/B149/B190 Service Manual 3.13.7).
  • Page 1027 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN BULLETIN NUMBER: B147/B149/B190 – 012 10/20/2004 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER – DSC332/DSC338/DSC328 LANIER – LD232C/238C LD228C RICOH – AFICIO 2232C/2238C/2228C SAVIN – C3224/C3828/C2820 SUBJECT: SC397/SC388 SYMPTOM: SC387/SC388 may occur when you install the machine. CAUSE: The drum plate can bend if development unit K (Y) is not set correctly. This will not let development unit C (M) get set correctly.
  • Page 1028 Tech Service Bulletin No.B147/B149 /B190 – 012 Hold the development unit. At the same time, slowly pull out the tape horizontally. 4. .Push in each development unit 5. Lower the drum plate. Then tighten two screws that hold the plate (the upper left one first, then the lower right one).
  • Page 1029 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN BULLETIN NUMBER: B147/B149/B190 – 012 REISSUE 10/25/2004 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER – DSC332/DSC338/DSC328 LANIER – LD232C/238C LD228C RICOH – AFICIO 2232C/2238C/2228C SAVIN – C3224/C3828/c2820 SUBJECT: SC386/SC387/SC388/SC389 SYMPTOM: SC386/SC387/SC388/SC389 may occur when you install the machine. CAUSE: the drum plate can bend if development unit k (y) is not set correctly. this will not let development unit c (m) get set correctly.
  • Page 1030 Tech Service Bulletin No. B147/B149 /B190 – 012 REISSUE 3. Hold the development unit. At the same time, slowly pull out the tape horizontally. 4. Push in each development unit. 5. Lower the drum plate. Then tighten two screws that hold the plate (the upper left one first, then the lower right one).Return the transfer belt...
  • Page 1031 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN BULLETIN NUMBER: B147/B149/B190 – 012 REISSUE 11/24/2004 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER – DSC332/DSC338/DSC328 LANIER – LD232C/238C LD228C RICOH – AFICIO 2232C/2238C/2228C SAVIN – C3224/C3828/C2820 SUBJECT: SC386/SC387/SC388/SC389 SYMPTOM: An SC386, SC387, SC388, or SC389 may occur when you install the machine or replace the development unit.
  • Page 1032 Tech Service Bulletin No. B147/B149 /B190 – 012 REISSUE 4. While holding the development unit with one hand, pull out the tape gently as shown. 5. Push in the four development units all the way to the rear. 6. Lower the drum plate.
  • Page 1033 Tech Service Bulletin No. B147/B149 /B190 – 012 REISSUE Action Required When Replacing The Development Unit If the symptom occurs after you install a new development unit, 1. Pull out the new development unit from the machine. 2. Check if there is any toner scattering inside the machine, and clean the area if necessary.
  • Page 1034 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN BULLETIN NUMBER: B147/B149/B190 – 013 10/20/2004 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER – DSC332/DSC338/DSC328 LANIER – LD232C/238C/LD228C RICOH – AFICIO 2232C/2238C/2228C SAVIN – C3224/C3828/C2820 SUBJECT: EARLY TONER NEAR END ALERT SYMPTOM: The toner near end alert shows even if toner remains in the toner cartridge.
  • Page 1035 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN BULLETIN NUMBER: B147/B149/B190 – 014 10/22/2004 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER – DSC332/DSC338/DSC328 LANIER – LD232C/238C LD228C RICOH – AFICIO 2232C/2238C/2228C SAVIN – C3224/C3828/C2820 SUBJECT: SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied.
  • Page 1036 1. Remove the tape and padding on the copier. To remove the tapes from the developer units follow the procedure below: a) Turn the transfer belt release lever counterclockwise. b) Loosen two screws that fasten the drum plate. Then lift the plate until you hear a click. B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 1037 (See Step a). 2. Remove the pin [A]. (As shown on the previous page.) NOTE: Keep the pin. You may need it to transport the machine in the future 1.4.3). B146I913.WMF 3. Remove the tape from the oil supply unit. B146I914.WMF B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 1038 5. Install the fusing unit [A] to the copier. B146I912.WMF 6. Shake the toner cartridge five or six times. 7. Install the toner cartridges to the copier. 8. Check that the hooks [B] hold the cartridge correctly. B146I915.WMF 9. Install the external tray [C]. B146I916.WMF B147/B149/B190...
  • Page 1039 NOTE: Paper tray number decals are also used for the optional paper tray or the optional LCT. Keep any remaining decals for use with these optional units. 18. Install the optional ARDF or the optional platen B146I928.WMF cover. B147/B149/B190 1-10...

This manual is also suitable for:

B149B190

Table of Contents